2G Huawei NSN Parameter Mapping

Parameters
Table
Recommended value
Frequency Band
Cell_Common
GSM900&DCS1800
MCC
Cell_Common
470
MNC
Cell_Common
02
NCC
Cell_Common
0~7
BCC
Cell_Common
0~7
GPRS Support
Cell_Common
support GPRS
EDGE Support
Cell_Common
No
Cellband
Cell_Common
RAC
Cell_Common
As per plan
FH MODE
Cell_Common
As per frequency plan
MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))
Cell_Common
63
Cell Extension Type
Cell_Common
Normal cell
Cell Antenna Hopping
Cell_Common
None
UL DTX
Cell_Common
Shall Use
Call Reestablishment Forbidden
Cell_Common
Yes
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Cell_Common
Direct Retry
Cell_Common
Yes
SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed
Cell_Common
Yes
DL PC Allowed
Cell_Common
Yes
TRX Index
TRx
Depend on invidual site
TRX No.
TRx
Cell Index
TRx
Site Index
TRx
Active State
TRx
Activated
Receive Mode
TRx
Depends on BTS/site
configuration
Basic_Parameter
63
DL DTX
Basic_Parameter
No (tunable based on
performance)
Direct Retry
Basic_Parameter
Yes
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Basic_Parameter
Basic_Parameter
Yes
UL DTX
Basic_Parameter
Shall Use
Flex HSN Switch
CH_MGT
Close
Flex MAIO Switch
CH_MGT
Close
Allocation TRX Priority Allowed
CH_MGT
Yes
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)
Call_Control
Call_Control
Call_Control
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)
Call_Control
26
Call_Control
18
Call_Control
12
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)
Call_Control
Call_Control
Call_Control
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)
Call_Control
26
Call_Control
18
Call_Control
12
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F)
Call_Control
Call_Control
Call_Control
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F)
Call_Control
26
Call_Control
18
Call_Control
12
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F)
Call_Control
Call_Control
Call_Control
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F)
Call_Control
26
Call_Control
18
Call_Control
12
Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))
Call_Control
24
MS MAX Retrans
Call_Control
N200 of SDCCH
Call_Control
23
AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))
Call_Control
24
AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))
Call_Control
24
Directed Retry Load Access Threshold
Call_Control
75
T3105(10ms)
HO
Max Resend Times of Phy.Info.
HO
30
ULQuaLimitAMRHR
HO
60
DLQuaLimitAMRHR
HO
60
ULQuaLimitAMRFR
HO
60
DLQuaLimitAMRFR
HO
60
UL Qual. Threshold
HO
50
DL Qual. Threshold
HO
50
MS Power Prediction after HO
HO
No
Inter-System Handover Enable
HO
No
PBGT HO Allowed
HO
Yes
MS Fast Moving HO Allowed
HO
No
Load HO Allowed
HO
Yes
SDCCH HO Allowed
HO
No
PT(s)
Idle_Mode
TO
Idle_Mode
Cell_Bar_Qualify
Idle_Mode
PI
Idle_Mode
Yes
CRH
Idle_Mode
6dB
Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes)
Idle_Mode
60(should same for same LAC)
BS-PA-MFRAMS
Idle_Mode
4 Multiframe Period
BS_AG_BLKS_RES
Idle_Mode
NCC Permitted
Idle_Mode
255
Cell_Bar_Access
Idle_Mode
ATT
Idle_Mode
Yes
T3122(s)
Other_Properties
10
T3111(ms)
Other_Properties
1000
T3109(ms)
Other_Properties
27000
T8(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
T3121(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
T3107(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
T7(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
T3101(ms)
Other_Properties
3000
Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm)
Other_Properties
85
Other_Properties
87
Other_Properties
92
Other_Properties
98
Other_Properties
105
Other_Properties
110
Filter Length for DL Qual.
Power_Control
Filter Length for UL Qual.
Power_Control
Filter Length for DL RX_LEV
Power_Control
Filter Length for UL RX_LEV
Power_Control
DL Qual. Lower Threshold
Power_Control
DL Qual. Upper Threshold
Power_Control
DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold
Power_Control
20
DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold
Power_Control
30
UL Qual. Lower Threshold
Power_Control
UL Qual. Upper Threshold
Power_Control
UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold
Power_Control
25
UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold
Power_Control
35
PC Interval
Power_Control
Min Access Level Threshold
Data_In_PCU
15
PRACH Blocks
Data_In_PCU
PBCCH Blocks
Data_In_PCU
GPRS Penalty Time
Data_In_PCU
10sec
GPRS Temporary Offset
Data_In_PCU
10dB
T3192
Data_In_PCU
500ms
T3168
Data_In_PCU
500ms
Default
Description
None
This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC), for example, the MCC of China is
460.
None
This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC).
This parameter specifies the network color code, which is provided by the telecom operator.
The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. The NCC is unique nationwide.
The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC).
This parameter specifies the base station color code. The BCC identifies the cells with the
same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC.
not support GPRS
This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a cell.
The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. In addition, a packet control unit (PCU) must be
configured on the BSS side, and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus
No
This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. Compared with GSM,
EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution
(EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS, which improv
As per plan
This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. Each new cell can be allocated
frequencies of only one frequency band. Once the frequency band is selected, it cannot be
changed.
GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band.
DCS1800: The cell
This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state
performs location management based on the routing area.
Each routing area has an ID. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message.
For example, value 0 indic
This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used.
As per frequency plan If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell where
the TRX serves does not perform FH. FH can be used to average the interferen
62
This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell.

After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS
determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by
comparing the TA and the value
Normal Cell
This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to implement
the extended cell.
A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay.
Theoretically, TA equals 219, that is, a delay of about 120
None
This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function.
In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are
transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or t
Shall Use
This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission
(DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
Yes
This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall
buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this
case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details.
see GSM Rec. 05.08.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
Yes
This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover
procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell.
Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless
network. It is n
Yes
This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed.

When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly, many subscribers may fail to
access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. In this case, the TCHs (includi
Yes
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed..
65535
255
This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC.
This parameter specifies the TRX number, which must be unique in one BTS.
The following two points should be paid attention to:
1. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board, This parameter specifies the
TRX number in a cabinet. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E, the TRX numbers
may be discontinuous.
2. If the logical TRX is separated from the physical board, one-to-one mapping between them
is not mandatory.
None
Cell Index must be unique in one BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. The value of this
parameter ranges from 0 to 8047.
Internal 2G cells: 0-2047
External 2G cells: 2048-5047
65535
This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a BSC.
Activated
None
62
This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS, not-activated and activated.
This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU.

The RF receive mode can be Not Support, Independent Receiver, Dividing Receiver, Four
Diversity Receiver, or Main Diversity.
The BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012II, BTS3006C, and BTS3002E do not support Main
Diversity.
The DBS3900 GSM and BTS3900 GSM support Four Diversity Receiver and Main Diversity.
comparing the TA and the value of this parameter.
Yes
This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell.
Yes
network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. If directed retry is
preformed frequently in a local network, you must adjust the TRX configuration of the BTS
and the network layout.
Yes
Shall Use
Close
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details.
see GSM Rec. 05.08.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall
buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this
case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the call. The number of
call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber
hooks on.
This parameter specifies whether the dynamic HSN is permitted to be used.

When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, this
parameter is set to YES. Thus, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be
reduced.
Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES, this parameter can be configured.
Close
This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO.

In tight frequency resuse, the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference
among channels occur.
When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, the
inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially.
In the case of aggressive frequency reuse, the recommended value is set to Yes.
Yes
This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel assignment.
If this parameter is set to YES, the TRX priority factor is effective. If this parameter is set to
NO, the TRX priority factor is ineffective.
Usually, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority
preferentially.
15
63
26
16
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the
current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment
threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of
the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since
there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an
adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
15
63
24
14
30
22
As per plan
As per frequency plan the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since
18
12
52
This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS unsuccessfully decodes the
SACCH message. For details of this parameter, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 05.08.
Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS, the counter S is enabled and the initial value
is set to this parameter value.
Each time an SACCH message is not decoded, the counter S decreases by 1. Each time an
SACCH message is correctly decoded, the counter S increases by 2.When the counter S is
equal to 0, the downlink radio link is considered as failed.Therefore, when the voice or data
quality is degraded to an unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved through power
control or channel handover, the connection is to be re-established or released.
4 Times
This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can be
sent by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure.
After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure, it always listens to the messages
on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group to which the
MS belongs.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or Immediate
Assignment Extend messages, the MS re-sends Channel Request messages at a specified
interval.
23
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS.
If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter
indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH.
For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200
SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
52
This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate AMR calls. For
details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).
64
This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. For details,
see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).
85
This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry.
When target cells are selected during direct retry, only the cells whose loads are smaller than
or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate target cells.
This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and
04.08.
When the BTS sends physical information to the MS, the BTS starts the timer T3105.If the
timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS, BTS resends physical
information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. The maximum times for resending physical
information is Ny1.
30
This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information retransmissions.

Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. If the number of retransmissions exceeds Ny1
before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS sends the BSC a
connection failure message, which can also be a handover failure message. After receiving
the message, the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops the timer
T3105.
During asynchronous handover, the MS constantly sends handover access bursts to the BTS.
Usually, the Timer T3124 is set to 320 ms. Upon detecting the bursts, the BTS sends a
Physical information message to the MS over the main DCCH/FACCH and sends the
MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the BSC. Meanwhile, the timer T3105 starts.
The Physical information containing information about different physical layers guarantees
correct MS access. If the timer T3105 expires before the BTS receives the SAMB frame from
the MS, the BTS resends the Physical information message to the MS.
For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08.
60
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An

emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is
greater than the value of this parameter.
60

emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is
65

65

emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is
60
This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. An

emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is greater
than or equal to the UL Qual. Threshold.
When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially
selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if
intra-cell handovers are allowed.
60
This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency handover.
An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is greater than or
equal to the DL Qual. Threshold.
When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially
selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if
intra-cell handovers are allowed.
No
This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead of the
maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. The purpose is to
minimize system interference and improve signal quality.
No
This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are allowed
The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent 3G cell and
from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes.
Yes
This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover algorithm.
Based on the path loss, the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search for a desired cell
in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. The cell must have less
path loss and meet specific requirements. To avoid ping-pong handovers, the PBGT handover
can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the same layer and hierarchy. The PBGT
handover cannot be performed on SDCCHs.
No
This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to
a macro cell. If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be
handed over to a macro cell, thus reducing the number of handovers. It is recommended that
this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The
fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions.
No
This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled.

The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion, improve success rate of channel
assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells, thus improving the network
performance. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in
the cells of the same layer.
The load handover is used as an emergency measure instead of a primary measure to adjust
abnormal traffic burst in partial areas. If load handovers occur frequently in a partial area, the
cell and TRX configuration of BTSs and the network layout should be adjusted.
No
This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled.
The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell
reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08
and 04.08.
This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs.
This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. This parameter is valid only before
the penalty time of cell reselection expires. For details, see GSM Rec. 0508 and 0408.
This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs.
No
This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection. It is invalid for cell
reselection.
1: barred
0: allowed
Together with CBA, this parameter determines the priority of cells. For details, see GSM Rec.
04.08.
Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority
0
0
Normal
Normal
0
1
Barred
Barred
1
0
Low
Normal
1
1
Low
Normal
Yes
Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short), sent on the broadcast channel, indicates
whether CRO, TO, and PT are used.
Actually, the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. For details, see
GSM Rec. 0408 and 0508.In addition, a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based cell
reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection.
When PI is set to 1, the MS obtains the value of C2 based on the broadcast system
information and determines whether a cell is reselected. When PI is set to 0, that is, C2
equals C1, the MS determines whether a cell is reselected based on the value of C1.
6dB
This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between different
LACs. This parameter can prevent frequent location update, thus lowering the possibility of
losing paging messages. For details, see the description of the cell reselection hysteresis.
20
This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update.
In the VLR, a regular location update timer is defined. When the location update period
decreases, the service performance is improved. When the signaling traffic of the network
increases, the usage of radio resources drops.In addition, when the location update period
decreases, the MS power consumption increases, and the average standby time is greatly
shortened.When setting this parameter, take into consideration the processing capability of
the MSC and BSC, the load on the A interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR.
Generally, a larger value is adopted in continuous coverage in urban areas and a smaller
value in suburbs, rural areas, or blind spots.
2 Multiframe Period
This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel, that is,
the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel.
In actual situation, an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. For details, see
GSM Rec. 05.02 and 05.08.
If the value of this parameter increases, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell
increases, thus reducing the number of MSs served by each paging sub-channel and
prolonging the average service time of the MS battery. For details about the calculation of the
paging group, see GSM Rec. 05.02. But the delay of paging messages increases, and the
system performance deteriorates as the value of this parameter increases.
This parameter should be set on the basis that the paging channel is not overloaded. In
addition, the value of the parameter should be as small as possible. The load of the paging
channels should be periodically measured on the running network. The value of this
parameter should be adjusted on the basis of the load.
A paging message must be sent simultaneously in all the cells in an LAC. Thus, the capacity
of the paging channel in a cell, that is, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell, must be
the same as or similar to that in other cells of an LAC.
This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. After the CCCH is
configured, this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and PCH.
This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance.
11111111
This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. This parameter is an
information element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages.
If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the corresponding
measurement report to the BTS. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). Each bit
maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit N is 0, the MS
does not measure the cell level of NCC N.
No
This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA).

Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed.
Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed.
Together with CBQ, this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. For details,
see GSM Rec. 04.08.
0
0
Normal
Normal
0
1
Barred
Barred
1
0
Low
Normal
1
1
Low
Normal
Yes
This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function. For
different cells in the same LAC, their ATTs must be the same.
If this parameter is set to Yes, network connection is not provided after the MS is powered off,
thus saving the network processing time and network resources.
10
This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element when the
BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS.
After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message, the MS makes another
attempt to access the network after the timer expires.
1000
This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the channel
deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected, and the purpose is to reserve a
period of time for repeated link disconnections.
The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. the RF
CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires.
27000
The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If the BSC receives
the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops; the BSC deactivates the
channel, if the timer T3109 expires.
10000
This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a handover
command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. If the timer expires, the outgoing BSC
handover fails.
10000
This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a handover
request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC
handover. If the timer expires, The MS reports a Clear REQ message.
10000
After the BSC sends a handover command, the timer T3107 is initiated. Before the timer
T3107 expires, the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message. After
the timer T3107 expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message.
10000
In an outgoing BSC handover, after the BSC sends a handover request message, the timer T7
is initiated. Before the timer T7 expires, the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a handover
acknowledgment message. After the timer T7 expires, the BSC sends an outgoing BSC
handover failure message.
3000
This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure.
The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. If the BSC
receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires, T3101 is stopped; if T3101 expires before
the BSC receives an EST IND message, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH.
85
This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement.

The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and
reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign
channels.
According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into
six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS
determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio
resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels
reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to
determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result
provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec.
08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too
obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference
is not reflected.
87

channels.
08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
is not reflected.
92

channels.
08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
is not reflected.
98

channels.
08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
is not reflected.
105

channels.
08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
is not reflected.
110

channels.
determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, reports a radio
08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
is not reflected.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the
average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.
average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.
average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.
average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold
and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the
upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter
specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control.
The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows:
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%
Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%
specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control.
25
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper
threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between
the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal
level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
35
specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control.
specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power control.
20
30
This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power control
commands.
15
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as a
candidate cell for handover.
This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges
from 1 to 12.
Value 1 indicates one PRACH.
Value 2 indicates two PRACHs.
...
Value 12 indicates 12 PRACHs.
This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges
from 1 to 4.
Value 1 indicates one PBCCH.
Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs.
Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs.
Value 4 indicates four PBCCHs.
10sec
This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. The timer is sent
through the system message broadcast in each cell.
10dB
When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS, the negative
offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires.
This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS.
Therefore, the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the BCCH is
shorter than the penalty time.
Value infinity indicates an infinity offset.
500ms
This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release after receiving
the last data block.
When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and
confirms that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received, the MS sends the Packet
Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts
T3192 at the same time.
If T3192 expires, the MS releases the TBF resources and monitors paging channels. During
the TBF release process, if the MS is in half-duplex mode and receives the Packet Uplink
Assignment message, the MS responds immediately.
If the MS does not receive the Packet Uplink Assignment message during the TBF release
process, the MS enters the packet idle mode. If the MS is in dual transfer mode, it enters the
dedicated mode.
500ms
This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment
message.
This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink
Assignment message. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet Downlink
Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description, T3168 is started to wait for the
Packet Uplink Assignment message from the network.
If the MS receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message before T3168 expires, T3168 is
reset. Otherwise, the MS initiates the PS access procedure again for four times. If the Packet
Uplink Assignment message is still not received, the MS regards that this uplink TBF
establishment has failed.
Configuration Policy
NSN PARAMETER
Name
BAND
None
None
MCC
MNC
This parameter should be set as required.

NCC
1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end and the
receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact position of the
other bits in the same burst and to determine whether the
received co-channel signals are useful signals. If a burst is incon
BCC
None
GENA
None
EGENA
None
BAND
None
RAC
None
HOP
The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate
may be affected.
DMAX
None
DMAX
None
AHOP
The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission
in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following
benefits:
1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS
and reducing system interference
2. On the downlink
DTX
The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is

allowed.
If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate
decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor
coverage, this parameter should be set to No.
Call reestablishment
RE
If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of
received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on
the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call
drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based
RXP
None
DR
None
DYNAMIC_SDCCH
None
None
PENA
TRX_ID
None
TRX_NUM
None
CI
None
If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards
in this BTS will be activated.
Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs,
and boards in this BTS will be deactivated.
When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be set to
Not Activated if the Active State of the upper-level BTS is set to
Not Activated.
BTS_ID
STATE
None
RDIV
The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate
may be affected.
DMAX
The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a

transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice
transfer. This function has the following benefits:
2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS,
reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation
inside the BTS
3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference
is reduced and the network quality is improved.
The DL DTX function is also restricted by the MSC.To enable this
function, the DTX function must be enabled on the MSC side.
If downlink DTX is disabled on the MSC side, downlink DTX cannot
be used irrespective of the setting of this parameter.
If downlink DTX is enabled on the MSC side, the setting of this
parameter determines whether downlink DTX is used in a cell.
DOWNLINK DTX
None
DR
If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of
received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on
the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call
drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based on the
balance conditions of the uplink and downlink levels.
RXP
The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is
allowed.
Call reestablishment lasts for a long time, and therefore the
subscriber cannot wait and hooks on. It is recommended that this
parameter be set to Yes.
RE
The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission
in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following
benefits:
2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS,
reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation
inside the BTS
3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference
is reduced and the network quality is improved.
DTX
None
HSN1
None
FLEXIBLE MAIO
MANAGEMENT
None
TRP
None
HRH3
None
HRH2
None
HRH1
None
HRTD3
None
HRTD2
None
HRTD1
None
HRH3
None
HRH2
None
HRH1
None
HRTU3
None
HRTU2
None
HRTU1
None
FRH3
None
FRH2
None
FRH1
None
FRTD3
None
FRTD2
None
FRTD1
None
FRH3
None
FRH2
None
FRH1
None
FRTU3
None
FRTU2
None
FRTU1
If this parameter is set to a small value, radio links are likely to be

faulty and therefore call drops occur.
If this parameter is set to a great value, a long time lasts before
an MS disconnects a call, and therefore resource usage is low.
This parameter takes effect on the downlink.
RLT
This parameter should be set as required: In the areas where the

traffic volume is low, this parameter can be set to 4 or 7 to
improve the success rate of MS access. In the cells where
congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the traffic volume is
high, it is recommended this parameter be set to 1.
RET
None
T200S
The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under
the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a
low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function
is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AHR
Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode
can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode.
AHRLT
The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under
the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a
low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function
is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AFR
Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode
can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode.
ARLT
If the value of the parameter is too high, the cells with heavy
loads are selected as candidate target cells so that the handover
does not make sense. If the value of the parameter is too low, it is
difficult to select candidate target cells.
DRT
The physical information is sent over the FACCH. Four TDMA

frames are sent each time at the interval of 18 ms. If the value of
T3105 is smaller than or equal to 18 ms, the BTS needs to
retransmit the physical information to the MS when the timer
T3105 expires for the first time.If the transmission of the physical
information over the FACCH is not complete, the expiration is
invalid because the time is shorter than an FACCH
period.Considering the previous factors, 20 ms is the reasonable
minimum value for this parameter. At present, the default value
of this parameter is 70 ms.
T3105
The value of this parameter can be increased when handover

becomes slow or the handover success rate decreases because of
clock problems or poor transmission.An MS can be handed over
only when Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link
Timeout is greater than the interval between EST IND and HO
DETECT (120-180 ms). Otherwise, the handover fails.
NY1
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ
handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the
uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.
QURH

handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the
downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.
QDRH

handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the
QURF

QDRF

handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the uplink
BQ handover is easily triggered.
QUR

handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the
QDR
If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS does not use the maximum
transmit power, and thus the handover success rate is decreased,
but the network interference is reduced.
POPT
None
ISHO
Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be

enabled. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce cross
coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and adjacent
channel interference.
EPB
It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special

areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving
micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special
conditions.
FMT
If this parameter is set to YES, extra interference may be

introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is used.
TRHO
When the authentication and ciphering procedures are enabled
on the existing network, this parameter can be set to Yes.
ESD
None
PET
None
TEO
The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the system.
QUA
The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum

interval of 5s. When necessary, the MS re-calculates C1 and C2
value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). The MS constantly
checks whether a cell reselection is required by referring to
following conditions:
Whether the path loss (C1) of the current serving cell drops below
0 within 5s.If yes, the path loss is too large.
C2 of an appropriate non-serving cell exceeds that of the serving
cell in 5s and the following conditions are met:
The C2 of a new cell in another LAC minus CRH (broadcast in
the system information 3 and 4 of the serving cell) exceeds C2 of
the serving cell in 5s.
A cell reselection is performed in the last 15s, and the C2 of the
new cell minus 5 dB constantly exceeds the C2 of the serving cell
in 5s.
A better cell exists if the above conditions are met.If a better cell
exists, the MS reselects a cell,and does not go to the previous cell
within 5s.
PI
An MS does not respond to pagings during location update. Thus,
the connection rate drops if cell reselection is performed.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, ping-pong location
updates occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH increases.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the cell that the MS
camps on for a long time may not be the best after the LA
changes.
HYS
It is recommended that you select a greater value, such as 16, 20,

or 25, in the area with heavy traffic, but a smaller value, such as 2
or 3, in the area with light traffic.
To properly specify the value of this parameter, it is necessary to
perform overall and long-term measurement on the entities
involved regarding their processing capability and traffic, such as
the processing capability of the MSC and BSC, and the load on the
A interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR.
The location update period in the MSC must be greater than that
in the BSC.
In the GSM system, it is possible that a powered-on MS is
identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update
request within a long period.
When the MS reselects another cell (in the same LAC), the MS is
restarted through T3212 timeout if the T3212 of the new cell
differs from that of the original cell.
When this parameter differs in the cells of the same LAC, it is
possible that the MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS
sends no location update request for a long period. In this case,
system plays "The subscriber you dial is power off." even though
the called MS is on.
In an LAC, the value of this parameter should be the same in all
cells.
PER
The larger this parameter is set, the larger the number of paging
sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the number of MSs on each
paging sub-channel. Setting this parameter larger can prolong the
average service life of MS batteries but increase the delay of
paging messages and reduce the system performance.
MFR
None
AG
The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with the
NCC. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too many call
drops.
PLMN
The CBA function applies to special conditions. If this parameter is

set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0, only handovers are
allowed in a cell, and direct access of an MS is not allowed. This
condition applies to a dual-network coverage cell. For a common
cell, this parameter should be set to 0.
The value of CBA affects the network access of an MS.
BAR
None
ATT
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may increase the channel
load and influence the access success rate.
T3122
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel
resources and cause the congestion.
T3111
T3109
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the
handover success rate.
T8
T3121
assignment success rate.
T3107
T7
immediate assignment success rate.
T3101
None
BO5
None
BO4
None
BO3
None
BO2
None
BO1
None
BO0
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the

network calculates the average value of the downlink signal
quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the
MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the
delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of
measurement reports.
QDS
network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality.
This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS.
When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay
and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of
QUS
levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the
BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the
delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of
LDS
network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels.
This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS.
When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay
and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of
LUS
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor

without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good
without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.
LDR
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor

without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded.
without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.
UDR
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level

becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is
reduced and the network interference is increased. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes
low, and call drop may easily occur.
LDR
parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes
UDR
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the signal quality of

the MS is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation
quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the signal quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery
life is reduced.
LUR

without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the
network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too
great value, the quality is poor without power control, thus the
conversation quality is degraded.
UUR
parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes
LUR
parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes
The value of this parameter is equal to that of UL Expected Level
at HO Access.
UUR
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power control
may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
power control may be performed frequently, thus wasting the
resources.
None
INT
SL
None
PRB
None
PBB
If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell, this
parameter should be set to a high value when the coverage area
of the micro cell is large.
GPET
None
GTEO
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the TBF resources

(including TFI and timeslots) are reserved for a long time. If no
downlink data needs to be sent, many resources are not used but
occupied for a long time.
If the timer is set to a smaller value, the MS releases the TBF
resources within a shorter period. However, if the network sends
new downlink PDU data packets, the network must initiate a
paging or immediate assignment procedure. Therefore, the
downlink TBF establishment takes a longer period.
If the download data packets from the network are not received
and T3192 does not expire, the network directly sends a Packet
Downlink Assignment message to establish a new downlink TBF,
thus shortening the TBF establishment time.
On one hand, the value of the T3192 timer depends on the
average transmission interval between two successive downlink
data.
On the other hand, you need to comprehensively analyze the
traffic models of the cell and take the service load of the cell into
consideration. When network resources are sufficient, that is the
GPRS congestion rate is low, the T3192 should be set to a large
value, shortening the time to establish new TBFs and improving
data transmission rate.
T3192
If the timer is set to a lower value, the MS can detect the TBF
establishment failure within a shorter period. If the TBF
establishment fails, the average delay of packet access is short,
but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio
environment decreases. In addition, the small timer value
increases the probability of the retransmission of the packet
access request, thus increasing the probability of reassignment
by the PCU and wasting system resources.
If the timer is set to a higher value, the MS takes a longer period
to detect the TBF establishment failure. If the TBF establishment
fails, the average delay of packet access is long, but the success
rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment increases.
T3168
Parameter Name
Unit
Step Size
frequency band in use
Default Value
GSM 900 (0)
mobile country code

mobile network code
BSIC NCC
bsIdentityCode
Obligatory in creation when

LCSE not connected to any
segment, otherwise read from
RNW db.
GPRSenabled
egprsEnabled
frequency band in use
GSM 900 (0)
routing area code
255
HoppingMode
No
msMaxDistanceInCallSetup
TA
255
TA
255
dtxMode
callReestablishmentAllowed
rxLevAccessMin
dBm
-105
drInUse
powerCtrlEnabled
TRX ID
Y
1
CellId
BTS ID
Administrative State
Locked (3)
diversityUsed
TA
255
drInUse
rxLevAccessMin
dBm
-105
callReestablishmentAllowed
dtxMode
hoppingSequenceNumber1
trxPriorityInTCHAlloc
amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis3
0.5dB
0.5dB
0.5dB
radioLinkTimeout
SACCH
maxNumberRetransmission
20
SDCCH LAPDm T200
AMR HR Radio Link Timeout
AMR Radio Link Timeout
drThreshold
dBm
-100
maxNumberOfRepetitions
amrHoHrThrUlRxQual
amrHoHrThrDlRxQual
amrHoFrThrUlRxQual
amrHoFrThrDlRxQual
hoThresholdsQualUL
hoThresholdsQualDL
msPwrOptLev
dBm
enablePwrBudgetHandover
Yes
fastMovingThreshold
SACCH
trhoTargetLevel
dBm
enableSDCCHHandover
penaltyTime
sec
20
20
temporaryOffset
dB
10
cellBarQualify
cellReselectParamInd
cellReselectHysteresis
dB
timerPeriodicUpdateMS
hours
0.5
noOfMultiframesBetweenPaging
noOfBlocksForAccessGrant
plmnPermitted
NCC
cellBarred
allowIMSIAttachDetach
interferenceAveragingProcess
dBm
-47
dBm
-90
dBm
-95
dBm
-100
dBm
-105
dBm
-110
pcAveragingQualDL / windows size
SACCH
pcAveragingQualUL / windows size
SACCH
pcAveragingLevDL / windows size
SACCH
pcAveragingLevUL / windows size
SACCH
PC Lower Thresholds Qual DL Rx

Qual
PC Upper Thresholds Qual DL Rx

Qual
PC Lower Thresholds Lev DL Rx

Level
PC Upper Thresholds Lev DL Rx

Level
PC Lower Thresholds Qual UL Rx

Qual
PC Upper Thresholds Qual UL Rx

Qual
PC Lower Thresholds Lev UL Rx

Level
PC Upper Thresholds Lev UL Rx

Level
powerControlInterval
sec
rxLevMinCell
dBm
-100
bsPRACHBlocks
bsPBCCHBlocks
gprsPenaltyTime
sec
gprsTemporaryOffset
dB
10s
10
Range
GSM 900 (0), GSM 1800 (1),
GSM 1900 (2), GSM 800 (5)
3 characters
2...3 characters
0...7
07
NoYes
Y/N
GSM 900 (0), GSM 1800 (1),

GSM 1900 (2), GSM 800 (5)
0255
No/BB/RF
0...255
0...2
Yes/No
-110...-47
Yes/No
Yes/No
1...16
165535
1...10 characters
Y/N
0...255
Yes/No
-110...-47
Yes/No
0...2
0...63/N
0...2
015
015
015
4...64
1, 2, 4 or 7
-110-47
5...35
0...7
0...7
-110... -47/ N
Yes/No
0...255
-109... -47/ N
Yes/No
20...640
0...70
Y/N
Y/N
0...14
0 / 0.1...25.5
2...9
0...7
07
Yes/No
Yes/No
-47FIXED
-110...-47
-110...-47
-110...-47
-110...-47
-110FIXED
1...32
1...32
1...32
1...32
0...31
-110...-47
012
14
10320
070
Parameter Name
Old Value
UL DTX
Shall Use
NA
Proposed
Value
Shall Use
Yes
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
TCH Immediate Assignment

Direct Retry
UL PC Allowed
DL PC Allowed
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
None
None
Encryption Algorithm
NA
<10000000>
None
DL DTX
NA
No
Remarks
None
Not matched
with other
vendor
Tunable
based on
None
performance
63
Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier NA
NO
Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment

ATT
NA
Yes
Tx-integer(RACH Timeslot(equals to a TDMA

frame,4.615ms))
NA
Cell_Bar_Access
NCC Permitted
BS_AG_BLKS_RES
NA
NA
NA
NO
Yes
20 (32
Satelite
Cells)
0
255
1
BS-PA-MFRAMS
4 Multiframe 4 Multiframe
Period
Period
Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes)
NA
40
CRH
PI
Cell_Bar_Qualify
CRO(2dB)
ACS
TO
PT(s)
6dB
Yes
0
0
No
0
NA
6dB
Yes
0
0
No
0
0
SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms))
24
24
RACH Busy Threshold
Unit
Bit Period
Ericsson 60
Need to
standerdize
To identify
MS request
16 at -94 dBm
or worst
coverage
Paging Times
Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable
NA
Disable
Directed Retry Load Access Threshold
NA
Speech Version
NA
47
TRX Aiding Function Control
NA
Allowed &
Recover
When Check
Res.
Random Access Error Threshold

RACH Min.Access Level
T200 SDCCH(5ms)
T200 FACCH/F(5ms)
T200 FACCH/H(5ms)
T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms)
T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms)
T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms)
T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms)
Use LAPDm N200
N200 of Establish
N200 of Release
N200 of SACCH
N200 of SDCCH
N200 of FACCH/Half rate
N200 of FACCH/Full rate
NA
0
60
50
50
150
200
60
60
No
5
5
5
23
29
34
200
1
60
50
50
150
200
60
60
No
5
5
5
23
29
34
Use Imm_Ass Retransmit Parameter
No
No
Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit(ms)
NA
Tunable
based on
performance
Need to
discuss with
Huawei
Max Transmit Times of Imm_Ass
NA
MS MAX Retrans
4 (7 for
4 (7 for
Satelite Site) Satelite Site)
Common Access Control Class
Not selected Not selected
Special Access Control Class
Not selected Not selected
Emergent Call Disable
NA
No
Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))
20
24
ECSC
Yes
Yes
None
If use
Imm_Ass
Retrans,
Default
All vendor
same
platform
MBR
0(for normal
cell); 2(near
to Dualband
cell)
0(for normal
cell); 2(near
to Dualband
cell)
Power Deviation Indication

Power Deviation(2dB)
Yes
1
Yes
1
Serving Band Reporting
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Qsearch I
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Qsearch C Initial
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
FDD Q Offset
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
FDD REP QUANT
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
FDD MULTIRAT Reporting
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
FDD Qmin
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Qsearch P
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
3G Search PRIO
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Invalid BSIC Reporting
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Scale Order
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Qsearch C
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
900 Reporting Offset
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
900 Reporting Threshold
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
1800 Reporting Threshold
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
FDD Reporting Offset
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
FDD Reporting Threshold
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Allow Reassign
No
No
Tunable
based on
performance
Allow EMLPP
Immediate Assignment Opt.
Short Message Uplink Disabled
Short Message Downlink Disabled
No
NA
No
No
No
NO
No
No
Frequency Band of Reassign
No
Same Band
Max Assignment Retry Times

AMR ACS(F)
AMR Starting Mode(F)
AMR ACS(H)
AMR Starting Mode(H)
Co-BSC/MSC Adj
SDCCH HO Allowed
Intracell HO Allowed
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
No
No
Yes
2
165
12
18
26
2
3
3
12
18
26
2
3
3
1
15
12
18
26
2
3
3
12
18
26
2
3
3
0
No
No
Yes
Tunable
based on
performance
None
Tunable
based on
None
performance
Load HO Allowed
No
Yes
MS Fast Moving HO Allowed

Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed
PBGT HO Allowed
Level HO Allowed
Fringe HO Allowed
BQ HO Allowed
TA HO Allowed
No
No
Yes
NA
NA
NA
NA
No
No
Yes
NO
Yes
Yes
Yes
Concentric Circles HO Allowed
NA
Yes (for MB
cell), No for
othres
Interference HO Allowed
Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold
Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold
Edge HO Watch Time(s)
Edge HO Valid Time(s)
Layer HO Watch Time(s)
Layer HO Valid Time(s)
PBGT Watch Time(s)
PBGT Valid Time(s)
Inter-layer HO Threshold
NA
5
10
5
4
5
4
5
4
NA
Yes
15
20
5
4
5
4
5
4
25
Inter-layer HO Hysteresis
Tunable
based on
dB
performance
Min DL Level on Candidate Cell
15
10
Tunable
based on
Grade
performance
Intracell F-H HO Allowed

Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s)
Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s)
F2H HO th
H2F HO th
Min Interval for TCH HOs
Min Interval for SDCCH HOs
Min Interval for Consecutive HOs
Min Interval for Emerg.HOs
Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed
Penalty Allowed
MS Power Prediction after HO
MR.Preprocessing
Transfer Original MR
Transfer BS/MS Power Class
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
6
NA
NA
Yes
No
NA
NA
Yes
Yes
5
4
30
10
4
2
6
2
NO
Yes
No
Yes
NO
Yes
Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR
NA
Once Every
Second
Allowed M.R Number Lost
NA
None
None
Grade
Grade
Second
Second
Second
Second
Second
Second
Second
Second
Second
None
None
Number of
MR
Filter Length for TCH Level
Number of
MR
Filter Length for TCH Qual

Filter Length for SDCCH Level
Filter Length for SDCCH Qual
NA
2
NA
6
2
3
None
Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV
Filter Length for TA
Penalty Level after HO Fail

Penalty Time after HO Fail(s)
Penalty Level after BQ HO
Penalty Time after BQ HO(s)
Penalty Level after TA HO
Penalty Time after TA HO(s)
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
30
10
30
10
63
10
Penalty Time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail(s)
NA
30
TA Threshold
DL Qual. Threshold
UL Qual. Threshold
UL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO
DL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO
UL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO
DL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO
Filter Parameter A1
Filter Parameter A2
Filter Parameter A3
Filter Parameter A4
Filter Parameter A5
Filter Parameter A6
Filter Parameter A7
Filter Parameter A8
Filter Parameter B
No Dl Mr.HO Allowed
No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit
Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit
System Flux Threshold for Load HO
Load HO Threshold
Load Req.on Candidate Cell
Load HO Bandwidth
Load HO Step Period
Load HO Step Level
MS Fast-moving Watch Cells
MS Fast-moving Valid Cells
MS Fast-moving Time Threshold
MAX Consecutive HO Times
Forbidden time after MAX Times
Interval for Consecutive HO Jud.
Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO
Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s)
UL Expected Level at HO Access
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
0
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
5
5
NA
NA
NA
NA
20
6
NA
NA
35
255
50
50
40
40
30
35
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
0
Yes
60
8
10
5
2
25
10
5
NA
NA
15
3
20
6
30
40
35
Number of
MR
Number of
MR
dB
dB
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
dB
Second
dB
None
None
Times
Second
Second
dB
Grade
Need to
discuss with
Huawei
K Bias
NA
UL to OL HO Allowed
OL to UL HO Allowed
RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed
RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed
TA for UO HO Allowed
UO Signal Intensity Difference
RX_LEV Threshold
RX_LEV Hysteresis
RX_QUAL Threshold
TA Threshold
TA Hysteresis
UO HO Watch Time(s)
UO HO Valid Time(s)
Yes
Yes
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
0
NA
NA
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
0
40
NA
50
63
0
5
4
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
dB
None
Bit Period
Bit Period
Second
Second
Assign Optimum Layer
System
optimization
System
optimization
None
Assign-optimum-level Threshold
TA Threshold of Assignment Pref.
TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed
TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref.
NA
NA
NA
NA
35
63
No
0
dBm
Bit Period
None
Bit Period
Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC
System
optimization
System
optimization
None
OtoU HO Received Level Threshold

UtoO HO Received Level Threshold
UtoO Traffic HO Allowed
Underlaid
subcell
NA
NA
NA
Underlaid
subcell
20
35
Yes
Traffic Threshold of Underlay
NA
Underlay HO Step Period(s)

Underlay HO Step Level
Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s)
Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s)
Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s)
MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
5
5
5
30
5
3
Outgoing-RAT HO Allowed
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Better 3G Cell HO Allowed
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Inter-RAT HO Preference
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer
None
Grade
Grade
None
Need to
discuss with
Huawei
Second
None
Second
Second
Second
None
HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s)
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
3G Better Cell HO Valid Time(s)
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Filter Length for SDCCH MEAN_BEP
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Filter Length for SDCCH CV_BEP
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Filter Length for SDCCH REP_QUANT
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT
NA
NA
3G
Parameter
Max Resend Times of Phy.Info.

T3105(10ms)
PC Interval
UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold
UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold
UL Qual. Upper Threshold
UL Qual. Lower Threshold
DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold
DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold
DL Qual. Upper Threshold
DL Qual. Lower Threshold
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
30
7
NA
35
25
0
4
30
20
0
4
Filter Length for UL RX_LEV
NA
Filter Length for DL RX_LEV
NA
NA
Filter Length for UL Qual.
NA
Filter Length for DL Qual.

MR. Compensation Allowed
NA
NA
NA
Yes
UL MR. Number Predicted
NA
None
10 ms
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
SACCH
Period
SACCH
Period
None
Number of
MR
DL MR. Number Predicted
NA
MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 0

MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual.
MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV
MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual.
UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold
UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff
DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold
DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff
BTS PC Class
AMR PC Interval
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
6
4
2
6
16
8
5
10
5
10
16
3
AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV
NA
AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV
NA
AMR Filter Length for UL Qual
NA
AMR Filter Length for DL Qual.
NA
AMR MR. Compensation Allowed
NA
Yes
Number of
MR
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
None
dB
None
dB
Grade
None
SACCH
Period
SACCH
Period
SACCH
Period
SACCH
Period
None
AMR UL MR. Number Predicted
NA
MR Number
AMR DL MR. Number Predicted
NA
MR Number
AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold

AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold
AMR ULQual. Upper Threshold
AMR UL Qual. Lower Threshold
AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold
AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold
AMR DL Qual. Upper Threshold
AMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
35
25
0
4
30
20
0
4
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 0
NA
dB
NA
dB
NA
dB
AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual.
NA
dB
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV
NA
16
dB
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual.
NA
Grade
AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold

AMR UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff
AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Threshold
AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff
AMR BTS PC Class
Idle SDCCH Threshold N1
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
5
10
5
10
16
2
dB
None
dB
None
dB
None
Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum

TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s)
Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed
80
60
NA
80
60
Yes
None
Second
None
Idle TCH Threshold N1
NA
Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m)
NA
Minute
TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%)
NA
50
Percentage
Interf. Priority Allowed

Active CH Interf. Meas.Allowed
Allocation TRX Priority Allowed
History Record Priority Allowed
Balance Traffic Allowed
Interf.of UL Level Threshold
Interf.of UL Qual. Threshold
Interf.of DL Level Threshold
Interf.of DL Qual.Threshold
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
NA
NA
NA
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
30
50
25
50
Filter Length for TCH Level
Filter Length for TCH Qual.
Filter Length for SDCCH Level

Filter Length for SDCCH Qual.
Updata Period of CH Record(min)
Updata Freq.of CH Record
AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed
2
2
NA
NA
NA
2
2
30
2
Yes
None
None
None
None
None
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Number of
MR
Number of
MR
None
None
Minute
None
AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold
NA
TCH req suspend interval(s)

Allow Rate Selection Based on
Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load
Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid
Subcell
Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Underlaid
Subcell
NA
60
NA
Yes
NA
30
NA
30
Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted
NA
Data service Allowed
NA
SMCBC DRX
Cell Load0 Threshold
Cell Load Change Delay
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Need to
discuss with
Huawei
Second
Need to
discuss with
Huawei
<011011100
0>
Yes
20
40
55
70
80
90
3
None
None
Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold
NA

NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH period(480ms)) NA
Need to
discuss with
Huawei
110
105
98
92
87
85
20
Need to
discuss with
Huawei
Max RC Power Reduction(2dB)
NA
Frame Start Time

DC Bias Voltage Threshold
Power Output Error Threshold
Power Output Reduction Threshold
VSWR TRX Unadjusted Threshold
VSWR TRX Error Threshold
Radio Resource Report Period(s)
CCCH Load Indication Period(s)
CCCH Load Threshold
Overload Indication Period
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
15
65535
3
2
2
2
2
10
15
80
15
Average RACH Load Timeslot Number
NA
5000
Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree)

Included Angle(Degree)
NA
NA
360
360
PWRC
Not selected Yes
Second
Discard
BCCH TS
Power while
calculating
Power
Control in
BBHopping
Support Half Rate

Abis Flow Control Permitted
Aiding Delay Protect Time(min)
Directly Magnifier Site Flag
5 (900), 0
(1800)
NA
Yes
NA
NA
5 (900), 0
(1800)
Yes
Yes
15
No
Second
None
Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout)
NA
None
Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited DM

response)
NA
None
Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error)
NA
None
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio link fail) NA
None
NA
None
NA
None
NA
None
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other)
NA
None
Drop Optimize Release Indication
NA
None
Drop Optimize ABIS Territorial Link Failure
NA
None
Drop Optimize Equipment Failure
NA
None
Drop Optimize Forced Handover Failure
NA
None
Drop Optimize No MR For Long Time
NA
None
Drop Optimize Resource Check
NA
None
Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Handover Timeout
NA
None
Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Handover Timeout
NA
None
Drop Optimize Intra-Bsc Out-Cell Handover

Timeout
NA
None
Drop Optimize Intra-Cell Handover Timeout
NA
None
Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch

T3101(ms)
ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms)
T3103A(ms)
T3103C(ms)
T7(ms)
T3107(ms)
T3121(ms)
T8(ms)
T3109(ms)
T3111(ms)
TREESTABLISH(ms)
T3122(s)
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Yes
3000
5000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
27000
1000
15000
10
None
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO access

fail)
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM
intervention)
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio
resource not available)
Parameters
Table
Recommended Value
Single band
900MHz
Multiband
Default
Frequency Band
Cell_Common
GSM900
GSM900&DCS1800
Administrative State
Cell_Common
Unlocked
Unlocked
Layer of the Cell
Cell_Common
MCC
Cell_Common
470
470
None
MNC
Cell_Common
02
02
None
NCC
Cell_Common
0~7
0~7
BCC
Cell_Common
0~7
0~7
Cell Priority
Cell_Common
Prior-1
Prior-1
Prior-1
Activity Status
Cell_Common
Activated
Activated
Activated
PCU
Cell_Common
255
255
255
GPRS Support
Cell_Common
support GPRS
support GPRS
not support GPRS
Support Baseband FH
and EDGE
simultaneously
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
Yes
EDGE Support
Cell_Common
No
No
No
8PSK power
attenuation grade
Cell_Common
Support NACC
Cell_Common
No
No
No
Support PACKET SI
STATUS
Cell_Common
No
No
No
Support NC2
Cell_Common
No
No
No
PCU Support 64
Neighbor Cells
Cell_Common
No
No
No
Level report switch
Cell_Common
Support
Support
Support
Cellband
Cell_Common
RAC
Cell_Common
As per plan
As per plan
As per plan
Support DTM
Cell_Common
Not Support
Not Support
Not Support
Support Enhanced DTM Cell_Common
Not Support
Not Support
Not Support
Cell_Common
00000001
00000001
FH MODE
Cell_Common
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
DL DTX
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
Yes
MAX TA(bit period(1

bit=0.55km))
Cell_Common
62
62
62
Cell Extension Type
Cell_Common
Normal cell
Normal cell
Normal Cell
Cell Antenna Hopping
Cell_Common
None
None
None
Enhanced Concentric
Allowed
Cell_Common
No
Yes
Yes
Cell Type
Cell_Common
Normal Cell
Concentric Cell
Normal cell
Attributes of UL And OL
Cell_Common
Subcells
NONE
NONE
NONE
BCCH Concentric
Attribute
Cell_Common
None
Underlaid Subcell
None
UL DTX
Cell_Common
Shall Use
Shall Use
Shall Use
Call Reestablishment
Forbidden
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
Yes
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Cell_Common
TCH Immediate
Assignment
Cell_Common
No
No
No
Direct Retry
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
Yes
SDCCH Dynamic
Allocation Allowed
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
Yes
UL PC Allowed
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
Yes
DL PC Allowed
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
Yes
Allow Dynamic
Shutdown of TRX
Power Amplifier
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
Yes
Allow Dynamic Voltage

Cell_Common
Adjustment
Yes
Yes
Yes
TRX Index
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
65535
TRX No.
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
255
Cell Index
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
None
Site Index
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
65535
Board Type
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
None
Active State
TRx
Activated
Activated
Activated
Abis Mode
TRx
Auto
Auto
Auto
Cabinet No.
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
Subrack No.
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
Slot No.
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
None
TEI
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
Out-BSC Subrack No.
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
Out-BSC Slot No.
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
None
Out-BSC Port No.
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
None
Out-BSC Timeslot No.

(8K)
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
255
RSL In Site Port No.
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
255
RSL In Site Timeslot

No.(8K)
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
255
RSL Logic No.
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
2048
Hop Type
TRx
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
None
Power Level
TRx
Power Type
TRx
Depends on
BTS/site
configuration
Depends on BTS/site
configuration
Default
HW_Concentric
Attribute
TRx
Depends on
BTS/site
configuration
Depends on BTS/site
configuration
None
TRX Priority
TRx
Level0
Level0
Level0
Shut Down Enable
TRx
Enable
Enable
Enable
TCH Rate Adjust Allow
TRx
Yes
Yes
No
TRX 8PSK Level
TRx
Wireless Link Alarm

Flag
TRx
No
No
No
Abnormal Release
Statistic Base
TRx
100
100
100
Abnormal Warn
Threshold
TRx
100
100
100
Abnormal Release
Threshold
TRx
50
50
50
Statical Period of Notraffic(5min)
TRx
48
48
48
Wireless Link Alarm

Critical Permit
TRx
Yes
Yes
Yes
WLA Prompting
Recover Period(5min)
TRx
12
12
12
Begin Time of WLA

Detection(hour)
TRx
End Time of WLA

Detection(hour)
TRx
Up Down Balance Basic

TRx
Difference
22
22
22
Up Down Balance
Floating Range
TRx
30
30
30
Up Down Balance
Alarm Threshold
TRx
80
80
80
Receive Mode
TRx
Depends on
BTS/site
configuration
Depends on BTS/site
configuration
None
Send Mode
TRx
Depends on
BTS/site
configuration
Depends on BTS/site
configuration
None
Allow Shutdown of TRX

TRx
Power Amplifier
Yes
Yes
No
Antenna Hopping Index TRx
No
No
No
Power Finetune
TRx
Default
Default
Default
TRX Antenna Hopping
TRx
None
None
None
Reverse Out-BSC Slot

No.
TRx
255
255
255
Reverse Out-BSC Port

No.
TRx
255
255
255
Reverse Out-BSC
Timeslot No.(8K)
TRx
255
255
255
Reverse RSL In Site

Port No.
TRx
255
255
255
Reverse RSL In Site

Timeslot No.(8K)
TRx
255
255
255
Transmission Type of
Abis Interface
TRx
TDM
TDM
TDM
Maximum PDCH
numbers of carrier
TRx
MaxAbisTSOccupied
TRx
32
32
32
Co-TRX for Dynamic

Transmission
Diversity(PBT)
TRx
255
255
255
InHDLCIndex
TRx
65535
65535
65535
HubHDLCIndex
TRx
65535
65535
65535
TRXNoInHub
TRx
255
255
255
XPUSlotNo
TRx
TRX Ability
TRx
PhysicalPassNo
TRx
Priority
TRx
NONE
QTRU Priority
TRx
255
255
RevInHDLCIndex
TRx
65535
65535
65535
Time Slot Power

Rerserve
TRx
Allow Dynamic Voltage

Basic_Parameter
Adjustment
Yes
Yes
Yes
Allow Dynamic
Shutdown of TRX
Power Amplifier
Basic_Parameter
Yes
Yes
Yes
MAX TA(bit period(1

bit=0.55km))
Basic_Parameter
63
63
62
DL DTX
Basic_Parameter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Basic_Parameter
DL PC Allowed
Basic_Parameter
Yes
Yes
Yes
UL PC Allowed
Basic_Parameter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Direct Retry
Basic_Parameter
Yes
Yes
Yes
TCH Immediate
Assignment
Basic_Parameter
No
No
No
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Basic_Parameter
Call Reestablishment
Forbidden
Basic_Parameter
Yes
Yes
Yes
UL DTX
Basic_Parameter
Shall Use
Shall Use
Shall Use
GSM900 Band Traffic

Load Share Threshold
CH_MGT
25
25
25
Channel Assignment
Allowed for Insufficient CH_MGT
Power
No
No
Yes
Qtru Down Link Path

Loss Compensation
CH_MGT
Qtru Estimate Bts

Power
CH_MGT
35
35
35
Qtru Down Power

Inadequate Last Time
CH_MGT
Qtru Down Power

Inadequate Stat Time
CH_MGT
Qtru Power Sharing
CH_MGT
None
None
None
Observed time of
uplink received level
difference
CH_MGT
Duration of uplink
received level
difference
CH_MGT
Smooth factor of uplink

CH_MGT
received level
100
100
100
Threshold of the
difference between
uplink received levels
CH_MGT
Allow Rate Selection

Based on
Overlaid/Underlaid
Subcell Load
CH_MGT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Tch Traffic Busy

Underlay Threshold
CH_MGT
50
50
50
Busy Threshold of TCH

Traffic in Overlaid
CH_MGT
Subcell
50
50
50
Flex HSN Switch
CH_MGT
Close
Close
Close
Flex MAIO Switch
CH_MGT
Close
Close
Close
Fix Abis Prior Choose

CH_MGT
Abis Load Threshold(%)
80
80
80
Flex Abis Prior Choose

CH_MGT
Abis Load Threshold(%)
80
80
80
TCH req suspend

interval(s)
CH_MGT
60
60
60
AMR TCH/H Prior Cell

Load Threshold
CH_MGT
40
40
40
AMR TCH/H Prior

Allowed
CH_MGT
As per plan
As per plan
As per plan
Update Freq.of CH
Record
CH_MGT
Update Period of CH
Record(min)
CH_MGT
30
30
30
Filter Length for SDCCH

CH_MGT
Qual.

CH_MGT
Level
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
Filter Length for TCH

Qual.
CH_MGT
Yes
Yes

Level
CH_MGT
Interf.of DL
Qual.Threshold
CH_MGT
40
40
40
Interf.of DL Level
Threshold
CH_MGT
25
25
25
Interf.of UL Qual.
Threshold
CH_MGT
40
40
40
Interf.of UL Level
Threshold
CH_MGT
10
10
10
History Record Priority

CH_MGT
Allowed
Yes
Yes
Yes
Allocation TRX Priority

Allowed
CH_MGT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Active CH Interf.
Meas.Allowed
CH_MGT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Interf. Priority Allowed
CH_MGT
Yes
Yes
Yes
TCH Traffic Busy

Threshold(%)
CH_MGT
50
50
TIGHT BCCH Switch
CH_MGT
No
No
No
Dynamic Transmission
Diversity(PBT)
CH_MGT
Supported
Not Support
DPBT
Not Support
Channel Allocate
Strategy
CH_MGT
Capability
preferred
Capability preferred
Capability
preferred
Enhanced TCH Adjust

Allowed
CH_MGT
Yes
Yes
Yes
TCH Minimum
Recovery Time(s)
CH_MGT
60
60
60
Cell SDCCH Channel

Maximum
CH_MGT
80
80
80
Idle SDCCH Threshold

N1
CH_MGT
AMR Starting Mode(H)
Call_Control
AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.hyst3(H)
Call_Control
10
10
15
AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.hyst2(H)
Call_Control
AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.hyst1(H)
Call_Control
AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.th3(H)
Call_Control
30
30
63
AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.th2(H)
Call_Control
18
18
26
AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.th1(H)
Call_Control
12
12
16
AMR UL Coding Rate

adj.hyst3(H)
Call_Control
10
10
15
AMR UL Coding Rate

adj.hyst2(H)
Call_Control
AMR UL Coding Rate

adj.hyst1(H)
Call_Control
AMR UL Coding Rate

adj.th3(H)
Call_Control
30
30
63
AMR UL Coding Rate

adj.th2(H)
Call_Control
18
18
24
AMR UL Coding Rate

adj.th1(H)
Call_Control
12
12
14
AMR ACS(H)
Call_Control
1101
1101
1101
AMR Starting Mode(F)
Call_Control
AMR DL Coding Rate

Call_Control
adj.hyst3(F)
AMR DL Coding Rate

Call_Control
adj.hyst2(F)
AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.hyst1(F)
AMR DL Coding Rate

Call_Control
adj.th3(F)
38
38
30
AMR DL Coding Rate

Call_Control
adj.th2(F)
28
28
22
Call_Control
AMR DL Coding Rate

Call_Control
adj.th1(F)
As per plan
As per plan
As per plan
AMR UL Coding Rate

Call_Control
adj.hyst3(F)
AMR UL Coding Rate

adj.hyst2(F)
Call_Control
AMR UL Coding Rate

Call_Control
adj.hyst1(F)
AMR UL Coding Rate

Call_Control
adj.th3(F)
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
AMR UL Coding Rate

Call_Control
adj.th2(F)
Yes
Yes
18
AMR UL Coding Rate

Call_Control
adj.th1(F)
20
20
12
11100100
11100100
11100100
AMR ACS(F)
Call_Control
Max Assignment Retry

Call_Control
Times
Frequency Band of
Reassign
Call_Control
Same Band
Different Band
Different Band
Short Message
Downlink Disabled
Call_Control
No
No
No
Immediate Assignment
Call_Control
Opt.
No
No
No
Abis Resource
Adjustment TCHH
Function Switch
No
No
No
Call_Control
Allow EMLPP
Call_Control
No
No
No
Allow Reassign
Call_Control
Yes
Yes
Yes
TDD Cell Threshold
Call_Control
TDD Cell offset
Call_Control
Best TDD Cell Number Call_Control
TDD Cell Reselect

Diversity(dB)
Call_Control
FDD Reporting
Threshold
Call_Control
FDD Reporting Offset
Call_Control
1800 Reporting
Threshold
Call_Control
Call_Control
900 Reporting
Threshold
Call_Control
Call_Control
Qsearch C
Call_Control
15
15
15
Scale Order
Call_Control
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
Invalid BSIC Reporting
Call_Control
No
No
No
3G Search PRIO
Call_Control
Yes
Yes
Yes
Qsearch P
Call_Control
15
15
15
FDD Qmin
Call_Control
FDD MULTIRAT
Reporting
Call_Control
FDD REP QUANT
Call_Control
RSCP
RSCP
RSCP
FDD Q Offset
Call_Control
Qsearch C Initial
Call_Control
Use Qsearch_I
Use Qsearch_I
Use Qsearch_I
Qsearch I
Call_Control
15
15
15
Serving Band Reporting Call_Control
Power Deviation(2dB)
Call_Control
Power Deviation
Indication
Call_Control
Yes
Yes
Yes
MBR
Call_Control
ECSC
Call_Control
No
Yes
NO
Radio Link
Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control
(480ms))
24
24
52
Emergent Call Disable
No
No
No
00000
00000
00000
Call_Control
Special Access Control

Call_Control
Class
Common Access
Control Class
Call_Control
0000000000
0000000000
0000000000
MS MAX Retrans
Call_Control
4 Times
4 Times
4 Times
Max Transmit Times of

Call_Control
Imm_Ass
Max Delay of Imm_Ass

Call_Control
Retransmit(ms)
Use Imm_Ass
Retransmit Parameter
Call_Control
No
No
No
N200 of FACCH/Full
rate
Call_Control
34
34
34
N200 of FACCH/Half
rate
Call_Control
29
29
29
N200 of SDCCH
Call_Control
23
23
23
N200 of SACCH
Call_Control
N200 of Release
Call_Control
N200 of Establish
Call_Control
Use LAPDm N200
Call_Control
No
No
No
T200 SDCCH
SAPI3(5ms)
Call_Control
60
60
60
T200 SACCH
SDCCH(10ms)
Call_Control
60
60
60
T200 SACCH TCH

SAPI3(10ms)
Call_Control
200
200
200
T200 SACCH TCH

SAPI0(10ms)
Call_Control
150
150
150
T200 FACCH/H(5ms)
Call_Control
50
50
50
T200 FACCH/F(5ms)
Call_Control
50
50
50
T200 SDCCH(5ms)
Call_Control
60
60
60
RACH Min.Access
Level(dbm)
Call_Control
-115
-115
-115
Random Access Error

Threshold
Call_Control
200
200
180
TRX Aiding Function

Control
Call_Control
Allowed &
Recover When
Check Res
Allowed & Recover

When Check Res
TRX Aiding Not

Allowed
Speech Version
Call_Control
11
11
11
AHR Radio Link

(480ms))
24
24
52
AFR Radio Link

(480ms))
24
24
64
AHR SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period

(480ms))
Call_Control
24
24
32
AFR SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period

(480ms))
Call_Control
24
24
48
Directed Retry Load

Access Threshold
Call_Control
75
75
85
Assignment Cell Load

Judge Enable
Call_Control
Disable
Disable
Disable
Paging Times
Call_Control
RACH Busy Threshold
Call_Control
16
16
16
SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period

(480ms))
Call_Control
24
24
31
T3105(10ms)
HO
Max Resend Times of

Phy.Info.
HO
30
30
30
TDD Better 3G Cell HO

HO
Allowed
No
No
TDD 3G Better Cell HO

HO
Valid Time(s)
TDD 3G Better Cell HO

HO
Watch Time(s)
TDD RSCP Threshold

for Better 3G Cell HO
HO
50
50
50
TDD HO Preference
Threshold for 2G Cell
HO
25
25
25
TDD Inter-RAT HO
Preference
HO
Preference for 2G
Cell By Threshold
Preference for 2G
Cell By Threshold
Preference for 2G
Cell By Threshold
Quick Handover
Offset(dB)
HO
68
68
68
Quick Handover Punish

HO
Value(dB)
63
63
63
Quick Handover Punish

HO
Time(s)
10
10
10
Ignore Measurement
Report Number
HO
Neighbor Cell Filter

Length MR Number
HO
Serving Cell Filter

Length MR Number
HO
Quick Handover Last

Time (0.5s)
HO
Quick Handover Static

Time(0.5s)
HO
Quick Move Speed

Threshold(m/s)
HO
80
80
80
Quick Handover Down

Trigger Level(dB)
HO
63
63
63
Quick Handover Up
Trigger Level(dB)
HO
63
63
63
Inner Cell Serious

HO
OverLoad Threshold(%)
90
90
90
Number of Satisfactory
HO
Measurements(s)
As per plan
As per plan
As per plan
Total Number of
Measurements(s)
HO
Inter UL And OL
Subcells HO Penalty
Time(s)
HO
Outgoing OL Subcell
HO
HO level Threshold(dB)
25
25
25
Incoming OL Subcell
HO
HO level Threshold(dB)
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
Step Length of OL
Subcell Load HO(dB)
HO
Yes
Yes
OL Subcell Load
Diversity HO Period(s)
HO
10
10
10
Load HO of OL Subcell
to UL Subcell Enabled
HO
No
No
No
Modified Step Length of

HO
UL Load HO Period(s)
Step Length of UL
Subcell Load HO(dB)
HO
UL Subcell Load
Hierarchical HO
Period(s)
HO
Distance Hysteresis
Between Boundaries of HO
UL And OL Subcells(dB)
Distance Between
Boundaries of UL And
OL Subcells(dB)
HO
10
10
10
Allowed Flow Control

Level of UL And OL
Subcell HO
HO
10
10
10
UL Subcell Serious
HO
Overload Threshold(%)
90
90
90
UL Subcell General
HO
Overload Threshold(%)
80
80
Assignment
Optimization of OL
HO
Subcell Allowed Or Not
No
No
No
Assignment
Optimization of UL
HO
Subcell Allowed Or Not
Yes
Yes
Yes
UL Subcell Lower Load

HO
Threshold(%)
50
50
50
Better 3G Cell HO
Allowed
No
No
No
HO
3G Better Cell HO Valid

HO
Time(s)
3G Better Cell HO
Watch Time(s)
HO
Ec/No Threshold for

Better 3G Cell HO
HO
35
35
35
RSCP Threshold for

Better 3G Cell HO
HO
50
50
50
HO Preference
Threshold for 2G Cell
HO
25
25
25
Inter-RAT HO
Preference
HO
Preference for 2G
Cell By Threshold
Preference for 2G
Cell By Threshold
Preference for 2G
Cell By Threshold
Ps UtoO HO Received
Level Threshold
HO
35
35
35
Ps OtoU HO Received
Level Threshold
HO
25
25
25
ReceiveQualThrshAMR
HO
HR
60
60
60
ReceiveQualThrshAMRF
HO
R
65
65
65
HO
En Iuo In Cell Load

HO
Classification HO Period
En Iuo Out Cell Serious

HO
OverLoad Threshold
90
90
90
En Iuo Out Cell General

HO
OverLoad Threshold
85
85
85
En Iuo In Cell Load

Classification HO Step
En Iuo Out Cell Low

Load Threshold
HO
30
30
20
MaxRetry Time after

UtoO Fail
HO
Penalty Time after

OtoU HO Fail(s)
HO
10
10
10
Penalty Time after

UtoO HO Fail(s)
HO
40
40
40
Penalty Time of UtoO

HO(s)
HO
10
10
10
Underlay HO Step Level HO
Underlay HO Step
Period(s)
HO
UtoO Traffic HO
Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
UtoO HO Received
Level Threshold
HO
32
32
35
OtoU HO Received
Level Threshold
HO
18
18
25
Incoming-to-BSC HO
Optimum Layer
HO
Underlaid Subcell
Underlaid Subcell
Underlaid Subcell
Pref. Subcell in HO of
Intra-BSC
HO
System
Optimization
System Optimization
System
Optimization
TA Threshold of ImmeHO
Assign Pref.
TA Pref. of ImmeAssign Allowed
HO
No
No
No
TA Threshold of
Assignment Pref.
HO
63
63
63
Assign-optimum-level
Threshold
HO
35
35
35
System
Optimization
System Optimization
System
Optimization
Assign Optimum Layer HO
UO HO Valid Time(s)
HO
UO HO Watch Time(s)
HO
TA Hysteresis
HO
TA Threshold
HO
63
63
63
RX_QUAL Threshold
HO
50
50
60
RX_LEV Hysteresis
HO
RX_LEV Threshold
HO
35
35
35
UO Signal Intensity
Difference
HO
TA for UO HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
RX_QUAL for UO HO
Allowed
HO
No
No
No
RX_LEV for UO HO
Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
OL to UL HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
UL to OL HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
Load Threshold for

TIGHT BCCH HO
HO
80
80
80
RX_QUAL Threshold for

HO
TIGHT BCCH HO
K Bias
HO
UL Expected Level at
HO Access
HO
30
30
30
Penalty Time on Fast

Moving HO(s)
HO
40
40
40
Penalty on MS Fast
Moving HO
HO
30
30
30
Interval for
Consecutive HO Jud.
HO
Forbidden time after

MAX Times
HO
20
20
20
MAX Consecutive HO
Times
HO
MS Fast-moving Time
Threshold
HO
15
15
15
MS Fast-moving Valid
Cells
HO
MS Fast-moving Watch
HO
Cells
Load HO Step Level
HO
Load HO Step Period
HO
10
10
10
Load HO Bandwidth
HO
25
25
25
Load Req.on Candidate

HO
Cell
75
75
75
Load HO Threshold
HO
85
85
85
System Flux Threshold

HO
for Load HO
10
10
10
ULQuaLimitAMRHR
HO
60
60
60
DLQuaLimitAMRHR
HO
60
60
60
ULQuaLimitAMRFR
HO
60
60
65
DLQuaLimitAMRFR
HO
60
60
65
RXLEVOff
HO
RXQUAL12
HO
50
50
50
RXQUAL11
HO
51
51
51
RXQUAL10
HO
52
52
52
RXQUAL9
HO
53
53
53
RXQUAL8
HO
54
54
54
RXQUAL7
HO
55
55
55
RXQUAL6
HO
56
56
56
RXQUAL5
HO
57
57
57
RXQUAL4
HO
58
58
58
RXQUAL3
HO
59
59
59
RXQUAL2
HO
60
60
60
RXQUAL1
HO
70
70
70
Cons.No Dl Mr.HO
Allowed Limit
HO
No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO
Limit
HO
60
60
60
No Dl Mr.HO Allowed
HO
No
No
No
Filter Parameter B
HO
Filter Parameter A8
HO
10
10
10
Filter Parameter A7
HO
10
10
10
Filter Parameter A6
HO
10
10
10
Filter Parameter A5
HO
10
10
10
Filter Parameter A4
HO
10
10
10
Filter Parameter A3
HO
10
10
10
Filter Parameter A2
HO
10
10
10
Filter Parameter A1
HO
10
10
10
UL Qual. Threshold
HO
60
60
60
DL Qual. Threshold
HO
60
60
60
Emergency HO TA
Threshold
HO
255
255
255
DtxMeasUsed
HO
Open
Open
Open
CfgPenaltyTimer
HO
255
255
255
UmPenaltyTimer
HO
10
10
10
RscPenaltyTimer
HO

NBR_RCVD_BLOCK
HO

HO
NBR_RCVD_BLOCK
Penalty Time after AMR

HO
TCHF-H HO Fail(s)
30
30
30
HO

HO
REP_QUANT

CV_BEP
HO

HO
CV_BEP

REP_QUANT

MEAN_BEP
HO

HO
MEAN_BEP
Penalty Time after TA

HO(s)
HO
30
30
30
Penalty Level after TA

HO
HO
63
63
63
Penalty Time after BQ

HO(s)
HO
15
15
15
Penalty Level after BQ

HO
HO
63
63
63
Penalty Level after HO

HO
Fail
30
30
30
Filter Length for TA
HO
Filter Length for Ncell

RX_LEV
HO

HO
Qual

HO
Level

Qual
HO

Level
HO
Allowed M.R Number

Lost
HO
Min Power Level For

Direct Try
HO
25
25
16
Sent Freq.of
preprocessed MR
HO
Twice every
second
Twice every second
Twice every
second
Transfer BS/MS Power

Class
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
Transfer Original MR
HO
Yes
Yes
No
MR.Preprocessing
HO
No
No
No
MS Power Prediction
after HO
HO
No
No
No
Penalty Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
Inter-BSC SDCCH HO
ALLowed
HO
No
No
No
Min Interval for

Emerg.HOs
HO
Min Interval for

Consecutive HOs
HO
Min Interval for SDCCH

HO
HOs
Min Interval for TCH

HOs
HO
ATCBHoSwitch
HO
Open
Open
Open
TIGHT BCCH HO Valid

Time(s)
HO
TIGHT BCCH HO Watch

HO
Time(s)
Quick Handover Enable HO
NO
NO
NO
H2F HO Threshold
HO
10
10
10
F2H HO Threshold
HO
30
30
25
Intracell F-H HO Last

Time(s)
HO
Intracell F-H HO Stat

Time(s)
HO
Intracell F-H HO
Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
YES
Min DL Power on HO
Candidate Cell
HO
15
15
15
Min UP Power on HO
Candidate Cell
HO
10
10
10
Inter-layer HO
Hysteresis
HO
Inter-layer HO
Threshold
HO
25
25
25
Inter-System Handover
HO
Enable
No
No
No
PBGT Valid Time(s)
HO
PBGT Watch Time(s)
HO
Layer HO Valid Time(s) HO
Layer HO Watch
Time(s)
HO
Edge HO AdjCell Valid

Time(s)
HO
Edge HO AdjCell Watch

HO
Time(s)
Edge HO Valid Time(s) HO
Edge HO Watch Time(s) HO
Edge HO DL RX_LEV
Threshold
HO
20
20
20
Edge HO UL RX_LEV
Threshold
HO
10
10
10
Interference HO
Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
Concentric Circles HO
Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
TA HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
BQ HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fringe HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
Level HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
PBGT HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
Rx_Level_Drop HO
Allowed
HO
No
No
No
MS Fast Moving HO
Allowed
HO
No
No
No
Load HO Allowed
HO
No
No
No
Intracell HO Allowed
HO
No
No
No
SDCCH HO Allowed
HO
No
No
No
Co-BSC/MSC Adj
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
PT(s)
Idle_Mode
TO
Idle_Mode
ACS
Idle_Mode
No
No
No
CRO(2dB)
Idle_Mode
Cell_Bar_Qualify
Idle_Mode
No
No
No
PI
Idle_Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
CRH
Idle_Mode
6dB
6dB
6dB
Period of Periodic
Location Update(6
minutes)
Idle_Mode
60
60
20
BS-PA-MFRAMS
Idle_Mode
4 Multiframe
Period
4 Multiframe Period
2 Multiframe
Period
BS_AG_BLKS_RES
Idle_Mode
NCC Permitted
Idle_Mode
11111111
11111111
11111111
Cell_Bar_Access
Idle_Mode
No
No
No
Tx-integer
Idle_Mode
32
32
32
ATT
Idle_Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Timer for UL Data

Forward(ms)
Other_Properties
10
10
10
WaitforRelIndAMRHR
Other_Properties
26000
26000
26000
WaitforRelIndAMRFR
Other_Properties
34000
34000
34000
T3103C(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
10000
10000
T3122(s)
Other_Properties
10
10
10
TREESTABLISH(ms)
Other_Properties
15000
15000
15000
T3111(ms)
Other_Properties
1000
1000
1000
T3109(ms)
Other_Properties
27000
27000
27000
T8(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
10000
10000
T3121(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
10000
10000
T3107(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
10000
10000
T7(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
10000
10000
T3103A(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
10000
10000
ImmAss A Interf
Creation Timer(ms)
Other_Properties
5000
5000
5000
T3101(ms)
Other_Properties
3000
3000
3000
Send Classmark
Enquiring Result To
MSC Enable
Other_Properties
No
No
No
Enquire Classmark
After In-BSC Handover Other_Properties
Enable
No
No
No
Base Hop Support

Close TRX Allowed
Other_Properties
No
No
No
Qtru Signal Merge

Switch
Other_Properties
No
No
No
MAX Paging Message

Number 0f Cell In
Period
Other_Properties
220
220
220
Average Paging
Message Number 0f
Cell In Period
Other_Properties
180
180
180
Paging Numbers of one

Other_Properties
Optimizing Msgs
Interval For Sending

Paging Optimizing
Msgs
Other_Properties
Paging Messages
Optimize at Abis
Interface
Other_Properties
Forced turn-on
Forced turn-on
Forced turn-on
Interfere Band Stat

Algorithm Type
Other_Properties
Cell Out-of-Service
Alarm Switch
Other_Properties
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lower-level sublink
resources preemption
switch
Other_Properties
No
No
No
Interference Band Interference Band

Measurement
Measurement
Algorithm II
Algorithm II
Interference Band
Measurement
Algorithm II
Sublink resources
preemption switch
Other_Properties
No
No
No
Force MS to Send Ho
Access SWITCH
Other_Properties
Yes
Yes
Yes
IntraCellHo to Ass
SWITCH
Other_Properties
No
No
No
Frequency Scan Result

Other_Properties
Type
Maximum/Mean
Value
Maximum/Mean
Value
Maximum/Mean
Value
Drop Optimize IntraOther_Properties

Cell Handover Timeout
Drop Optimize IntraBsc Out-Cell Handover Other_Properties

Timeout
Drop Optimize Out-Bsc

Other_Properties
Handover Timeout
Drop Optimize Into-Bsc

Other_Properties
Handover Timeout
Drop Optimize
Resource Check
Other_Properties
Drop Optimize No MR
For Long Time
Other_Properties
Drop Optimize Forced

Handover Failure
Other_Properties
Drop Optimize
Equipment Failure
Other_Properties
Drop Optimize ABIS

Territorial Link Failure
Other_Properties
Drop Optimize Release

Other_Properties
Indication
Drop Optimize
Connection Failure
(other)
Other_Properties
Drop Optimize
Connection Failure
(radio resource not
available)
Other_Properties
Drop Optimize
Connection Failure (OM Other_Properties
intervention)
Drop Optimize
Connection Failure (HO Other_Properties
access fail)
Drop Optimize
Connection Failure
(radio link fail)
Other_Properties
Drop Optimize Error

Indication (sequence
error)
Other_Properties
Drop Optimize Error

Indication (unsolicited
DM response)
Other_Properties
Drop Optimize Error

Indication (T200
timeout)
Other_Properties
Directly Magnifier Site

Flag
Other_Properties
No
No
No
Aiding Delay Protect

Time(min)
Other_Properties
15
15
15
Abis Flow Control

Permitted
Other_Properties
Yes
Yes
Yes
Support Half Rate
Other_Properties
Yes
Yes
No
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
Other_Properties
PWRC
Other_Properties
Yes
Yes
Yes
ActGene
Other_Properties
PS LowPri ServicePRI
Other_Properties
PS HighPRI ServicePRI
Other_Properties
CS Data ServicePRI
Other_Properties
CS Voice ServicePRI
Other_Properties
Included Angle(Degree) Other_Properties
360
360
360
Antenna Azimuth
Angle(Degree)
Other_Properties
360
360
360
Average RACH Load

Timeslot Number
Other_Properties
5000
5000
5000
Overload Indication
Period
Other_Properties
15
15
15
CCCH Load Threshold
Other_Properties
80
80
80
CCCH Load Indication

Period(s)
Other_Properties
15
15
15
Radio Resource Report

Other_Properties
Period(s)
10
10
10
Frequency Adjust Value Other_Properties
36671
36671
36671
Frequency Adjust
Switch
Other_Properties
NO
NO
NO
VSWR TRX Error

Threshold
Other_Properties
VSWR TRX Unadjusted

Other_Properties
Threshold
Power Output
Reduction Threshold
Other_Properties
Power Output Error

Threshold
Other_Properties
DC Bias Voltage
Threshold
Other_Properties
Frame Start Time
Other_Properties
65535
65535
65535
Max RC Power
Reduction(2dB)
Other_Properties
Interf.Calculation
Period(SACCH
period(480ms))
Other_Properties
20
20
20
Interf. Band Threshold

5 (-dBm)
Other_Properties
85
85
85

4 (-dBm)
Other_Properties
87
87
87

3 (-dBm)
Other_Properties
92
92
92

2 (-dBm)
Other_Properties
98
98
98

1 (-dBm)
Other_Properties
105
105
105

0 (-dBm)
Other_Properties
110
110
110
Cell Direct Try

Forbidden Threshold
Other_Properties
50
SMCBC DRX
Other_Properties
Yes
Yes
Yes
Data service Allowed
Other_Properties
118
118
118
StartUp
StartUp
not StartUp
Power boost before HO

Other_Properties
enabled or not
Voice quality report

switch
Other_Properties
report
report
not report
Diversity LNA Bypass

Permitted
Other_Properties
255
255
Yes
HwIII MA FreqHop Gain

Power_Control
8(dB)
53
53
53

Power_Control
7(dB)
50
50
50

Power_Control
6(dB)
47
47
47

Power_Control
5(dB)
43
43
43

Power_Control
4(dB)
40
40
40

Power_Control
3(dB)
30
30
30

Power_Control
2(dB)
20
20
20

Power_Control
1(dB)
HwIII UL MAX
UpStep(dB)
Power_Control
HwIII UL MAX
DownStep(dB)
Power_Control
HwIII UL AHS Rex

Qual.Lower
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
12
12
12
HwIII UL AHS Rex

Qual.Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
16
16
16
HwIII UL AFS Rex

Qual.Lower
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
12
12
12
HwIII UL AFS Rex

Qual.Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
16
16
16
HwIII UL HS Rex
Qual.Lower
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
16
16
16
HwIII UL HS Rex
Qual.Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
22
22
22
HwIII UL FS Rex Qual.

Lower Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
16
16
16
HwIII UL FS Rex Qual.

Upper Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
22
22
22
HwIII UL RexLev Lower

Power_Control
Threshold
20
20
20
HwIII UL RexLev Upper

Power_Control
Threshold
30
30
30
Power_Control
HwIII UL RexLev Adjust

Power_Control
Factor
HwIII UL Rex Qual.

Slide Window
Power_Control
HwIII UL RexLev Slide

Window
Power_Control
HwIII UL Rex
Qual.Exponent Filter
Length
Power_Control
HwIII UL RexLev
Power_Control
Exponent Filter Length
HwIII DL MAX UpStep

(dB)
Power_Control
HwIII DL MAX
DownStep(dB)
Power_Control
12
12
12
HwIII UL Rex
Qual.Adjust Factor
HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual.

Power_Control
Lower Threshold(dB)
HwIII DL AHS Rex

Qual.Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
16
16
16
HwIII DL AFS Rex

Qual.Lower
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
12
12
12
HwIII DL AFS Rex

Qual.Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
16
16
16
HwIII DL HS Rex Qual.

Lower Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
16
16
16
HwIII DL HS Rex Qual.

Upper Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
22
22
22
HwIII DL FS Rex Qual.

Lower Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
16
16
16
HwIII DL FS Rex Qual.

Upper Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
22
22
22
HwIII DL RexLev Lower

Power_Control
Threshold
25
25
25
HwIII DL RexLev Upper

Power_Control
Threshold
35
35
35
Power_Control
HwIII DL RexLev Adjust

Power_Control
Factor
HwIII DL Rex Qual.

Slide Window
Power_Control
HwIII DL RexLev Slide

Window
Power_Control
HwIII DL Rex Qual.

Adjust Factor
HwIII DL Rex Qual.

Power_Control
HwIII DL RexLev
Power_Control
HwIII Traffic Channel

Discard MR Number
Power_Control
HwIII Signal Channel

Discard MR Number
Power_Control
HwIII Down Link Power

Power_Control
Control Adjust Period
HwIII Up Link Power

Control Adjust Period
Power_Control
HwIII Number of lost

MRs allowed
Power_Control
AMR BTS PC Class
Power_Control
16
16
16
AMR DL Qual Bad

UpLEVDiff
Power_Control
AMR DL Qual Bad Trig

Threshold
Power_Control
AMR UL Qual. Bad

UpLEVDiff
Power_Control
AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig

Power_Control
Threshold
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC

Value by Qual.
Power_Control
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC

Value by RX_LEV
Power_Control
16
16
16
AMR MAX Down Adj. PC

Power_Control
Value by Qual.
AMR MAX Down Adj.

Value Qual. Zone 2
Power_Control
AMR MAX Down Adj.

Value Qual. Zone 1
Power_Control
AMR MAX Down Adj.

Value Qual. Zone 0
Power_Control
AMR DL Qual. Lower

Threshold
Power_Control
AMR DL Qual. Upper

Threshold
Power_Control
AMR DL RX_LEV Lower

Power_Control
Threshold
30
30
25
AMR DL RX_LEV Upper

Power_Control
Threshold
40
40
35
AMR UL Qual. Lower

Threshold
Power_Control
AMR ULQual. Upper

Threshold
Power_Control
AMR UL RX_LEV Lower

Power_Control
Threshold
25
25
20
AMR UL RX_LEV Upper

Power_Control
Threshold
35
35
30
AMR DL MR. Number

Predicted
Power_Control
AMR UL MR. Number

Predicted
Power_Control
Yes
Yes
Yes
AMR MR.
Power_Control
Compensation Allowed
AMR Filter Length for

DL Qual.
Power_Control

UL Qual
Power_Control

DL RX_LEV
Power_Control

UL RX_LEV
Power_Control
AMR PC Interval
Power_Control
BTS PC Class
Power_Control
16
16
16
DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control
DL Qual. Bad Trig

Threshold
Power_Control
UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control
UL Qual. Bad Trig

Threshold
Power_Control
MAX Up Adj. PC Value

by Qual.
Power_Control
MAX Up Adj. PC Value

by RX_LEV
Power_Control
16
16
16
MAX Down Adj. PC

Value by Qual.
Power_Control
MAX Down Adj.Value

Qual.Zone 2
Power_Control
MAX Down Adj.Value

Qual.Zone 1
Power_Control
MAX Down Adj.Value

Qual.Zone 0
Power_Control
DL MR. Number
Predicted
Power_Control
UL MR. Number
Predicted
Power_Control
MR. Compensation
Allowed
Power_Control
Yes
Yes
Yes
Filter Length for DL

Qual.
Power_Control
Filter Length for UL

Qual.
Power_Control
Filter Length for DL

RX_LEV
Power_Control
Filter Length for UL

RX_LEV
Power_Control
Power Control
Algorithm Switch
Power_Control
HWII Power
Control
HWII Power Control
HW-II Power
Control
DL Qual. Lower
Threshold
Power_Control
DL Qual. Upper
Threshold
Power_Control
DL RX_LEV Lower
Threshold
Power_Control
30
30
25
DL RX_LEV Upper
Threshold
Power_Control
40
40
35
UL Qual. Lower
Threshold
Power_Control
UL Qual. Upper
Threshold
Power_Control
UL RX_LEV Lower
Threshold
Power_Control
25
25
20
UL RX_LEV Upper
Threshold
Power_Control
35
35
30
PC Interval
Power_Control
Constant of Filtering
the Collision Signal
Strength for Power
Control
Data_In_PCU
Measured Receive
Power Level Channel
Data_In_PCU
pdch
pdch
pdch
BTS Power Attenuation

on PBCCH
Data_In_PCU
-2dB
-2dB
-2dB
Signal Strength Filter

Period in Transfer Mode
Data_In_PCU
10
10
10
Signal Strength Filter

Period in Idle Mode
Data_In_PCU
10
10
10
Initial Power Level
Data_In_PCU
14
14
14
Alpha Parameter
Data_In_PCU
Maximum Value of
N3105
Data_In_PCU
10
10
10
Maximum Value of
N3103
Data_In_PCU
Maximum Value of
N3101
Data_In_PCU
20
20
20
Release Delay of
Downlink TBF(ms)
Data_In_PCU
2400
2400
2400
Inactive Period of
Extended Uplink
TBF(ms)
Data_In_PCU
2000
2000
2000
Release Delay of Nonextended Uplink

TBF(ms)
Data_In_PCU
120
120
120
Load Reselect Level

Threshold
Data_In_PCU
40
40
40
GPRS Quality Threshold
Data_In_PCU
EDGE 8PSK Quality

Threshold
Data_In_PCU
16
16
16
EDGE GMSK Quality

Threshold
Data_In_PCU
Cell Reselect Interval(s)
Data_In_PCU
Normal Cell Reselection

Worsen Level
Threshold
Data_In_PCU
Normal Cell Reselection

Watch Period
Data_In_PCU
10
10
10
Cell Normal Reselection

Allowed
Data_In_PCU
Permit
Permit
Permit
Cell Load Reselection

Allowed
Data_In_PCU
Permit
Permit
Permit
Cell Urgent Reselection

Allowed
Data_In_PCU
Permit
Permit
Permit
2G/3G Cell Reselection

Strategy
Data_In_PCU
Preference for 2G
Cell
Preference for 2G
Cell
Preference for 2G
Cell
Filter Window Size
Data_In_PCU
Allowed Measure
Report Missed Number
Data_In_PCU
Load Reselection
Receive Threshold(%)
Data_In_PCU
60
60
60
Load Reselection Start

Threshold(%)
Data_In_PCU
85
85
85
MS Rx Quality Worsen
Ratio Threshold(%)
Data_In_PCU
30
30
30
MS Rx Quality Statistic
Threshold
Data_In_PCU
200
200
200
Cell Penalty Last

Time(s)
Data_In_PCU
10
10
10
Cell Penalty Level
Data_In_PCU
30
30
30
Cell Reselection
Hysterisis
Data_In_PCU
Min Access Level

Threshold
Data_In_PCU
15
15
15
Support QoS Optimize
Data_In_PCU
Not Support
Not Support
Not Support
No handover
No handover
No handover
between
between underlaid between underlaid
underlaid subcell
subcell and overlaid
subcell and
and overlaid
subcell
overlaid subcell
subcell
PS Concentric Cell HO
Strategy
Data_In_PCU
Transmission Delay of
POC Service
Data_In_PCU
650
650
650
Max. GBR for POC

Service
Data_In_PCU
16
16
16
Min. GBR for POC

Service
Data_In_PCU
Move Packet
Assignment Down to
BTS
Data_In_PCU
Not Support
Not Support
Not Support
Move Immediate
Assignment Down to
BTS
Data_In_PCU
Not Support
Not Support
Not Support
Support Gbr QoS
Data_In_PCU
Not Support
Not Support
Not Support
Downlink Default MCS

Type
Data_In_PCU
MCS6
MCS6
MCS6
Downlink Fixed MCS

Type
Data_In_PCU
UNFIXED
UNFIXED
UNFIXED
Uplink Default MCS

Type
Data_In_PCU
MCS2
MCS2
MCS2
Uplink Fixed MCS Type
Data_In_PCU
UNFIXED
UNFIXED
UNFIXED
BEP Period
Data_In_PCU
Link Quality Control

Mode
Data_In_PCU
LA
LA
LA
Down TBF threshold

From CS4 to CS3
Data_In_PCU
Down TBF threshold

From CS3 to CS2
Data_In_PCU
Down TBF threshold

From CS2 to CS1
Data_In_PCU
10
10
10
Down TBF threshold

From CS3 to CS4
Data_In_PCU
Down TBF threshold

From CS2 to CS3
Data_In_PCU
Down TBF threshold

From CS1 to CS2
Data_In_PCU
Downlink Default CS
Type
Data_In_PCU
CS2
CS2
CS2
Downlink Fixed CS
Type
Data_In_PCU
UNFIXED
UNFIXED
UNFIXED
Up TBF threshold From

CS4 to CS3
Data_In_PCU

CS3 to CS2
Data_In_PCU

CS2 to CS1
Data_In_PCU
10
10
10

CS3 to CS4
Data_In_PCU

CS2 to CS3
Data_In_PCU

CS1 to CS2
Data_In_PCU
Uplink Default CS Type
Data_In_PCU
CS1
CS1
CS1
Uplink Fixed CS Type
Data_In_PCU
UNFIXED
UNFIXED
UNFIXED
Background Service
Priority Weight
Data_In_PCU
THP3 Priority Weight
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
ARP3 Priority Weight
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
Timer of Releasing Abis

Timeslot
Data_In_PCU
15
15
15
Reservation Threshold
of Dynamic Channel
Conversion
Data_In_PCU
Level of Preempting
Dynamic Channel
Data_In_PCU
All dynamic
channels can be
pre-empted
All dynamic
channels can be
pre-empted
All dynamic
channels can be
preempted.
Timer of Releasing Idle

Dynamic Channel
Data_In_PCU
20
20
20
Dynamic Channel
Conversion Parameter
of Concentric Cell
Data_In_PCU
Only convert at
UL
Only convert at UL
only convert
dynamic channel
at UL
PDCH Downlink
Multiplex Threshold
Data_In_PCU
80
80
80
PDCH Uplink Multiplex

Threshold
Data_In_PCU
70
70
70
Downlink Multiplex
Threshold of Dynamic
Channel Conversion
Data_In_PCU
20
20
20
Uplink Multiplex
Threshold of Dynamic
Channel Conversion
Data_In_PCU
20
20
20
Maximum Ratio
Threshold of PDCHs in
a Cell
Data_In_PCU
30
30
30
MultiBand reporting
Data_In_PCU
Report the
frequencies of six
strongest cells
Report the
frequencies of six
strongest cells
Report the
frequencies of six
strongest cells
Threshold of HCS
Signal Strength
Data_In_PCU
-110dB
-110dB
-110dB
Cell HCS Prior Class
Data_In_PCU
Maximum TX Power for

Access PCH
Data_In_PCU
Minimum Receiving
level for Access
Data_In_PCU
Exclusive Access
Data_In_PCU
Not Exclusive
Not Exclusive
Not Exclusive
Cell Access Bar Switch
Data_In_PCU
Permit Cell
Access
Permit Cell Access
Permit Cell Access
Accessorial Hysteresis
of Cell Selection In New
Routing Area
Data_In_PCU
2dB
2dB
2dB
Cell Reselection
Forbidden Time
Data_In_PCU
10sec
10sec
10sec
Allow MS to Access to
another Cell
Data_In_PCU
Yes
Yes
Yes
Exceptional Rule for

GPRS Reselect Offset
Data_In_PCU
GPRS Cell Reselect

Hysteresis Applied to
C31 Criterion or not
Data_In_PCU
c31standard
c31standard
c31standard
GPRS Cell Reselect

Hysteresis
Data_In_PCU
2dB
2dB
2dB
Support PSI Status

Message
Data_In_PCU
No
No
No
Allow MR Command or
not
Data_In_PCU
No
No
No
PSI1 Repetition Period
Data_In_PCU
Persistence Level 4
Data_In_PCU
16
16
16
Persistence Level 3
Data_In_PCU
14
14
14
Persistence Level 2
Data_In_PCU
13
13
13
Persistence Level 1
Data_In_PCU
12
12
12
Extension Transmission
Timeslots of Random
Access
Data_In_PCU
20
20
20
Minimum Timeslots
between Two
Successive Channel
Requests
Data_In_PCU
20
20
20
Maximum
Retransmissions for
Radio Priority 4
Data_In_PCU
Maximum
Retransmissions for
Radio Priority 3
Data_In_PCU
Maximum
Retransmissions for
Radio Priority 2
Data_In_PCU
Maximum
Retransmissions for
Radio Priority 1
Data_In_PCU
Access Control Class
Data_In_PCU
PRACH Blocks
Data_In_PCU
PAGCH Blocks
Data_In_PCU
PBCCH Blocks
Data_In_PCU
Cell Reselection MR
Period in Packet
Transfer Mode
Data_In_PCU
0.96sec
0.96sec
0.96sec
Cell Reselection MR
Period in Packet Idle
Mode
Data_In_PCU
15.36sec
15.36sec
15.36sec
Non-DRX Period
Data_In_PCU
0.24sec
0.24sec
0.24sec
GPRS Reselection
Offset
Data_In_PCU
-2db
-2db
-2dB
GPRS Penalty Time
Data_In_PCU
10sec
10sec
10sec
GPRS Temporary Offset
Data_In_PCU
10dB
10dB
10dB
Extension MR Period
Data_In_PCU
60sec
60sec
60sec
Extension MR Type
Data_In_PCU
type1
type1
type1
Interference Frequency
Data_In_PCU
NCC_PERMITTED
Data_In_PCU
Extension
Measurement
Command
Data_In_PCU
em0
em0
em0
BSS Paging
Coordination
Data_In_PCU
Yes
Yes
Yes
Support 11BIT EGPRS

Access
Data_In_PCU
Yes
Yes
Yes
Routing Area Color

Code
Data_In_PCU
Packet Access Priority
Data_In_PCU
Packet access of
level 4
Packet access of
level 4
Packet access of
level 4
Support
SPLIT_PG_CYCLE on
CCCH
Data_In_PCU
No
No
No
Network Control Mode
Data_In_PCU
nc0
nc0
nc0
Pan Max.
Data_In_PCU
12
12
12
Pan Increment
Data_In_PCU
Pan Decrement
Data_In_PCU
BS_CV_MAX
Data_In_PCU
10
10
10
Control Acknowledge
Type
Data_In_PCU
Four access
pulses by default
Four access pulses Four access pulses

by default
by default
Access Burst Type
Data_In_PCU
8bit
8bit
8bit
Max. Duration of
DRX(s)
Data_In_PCU
4s
T3192
Data_In_PCU
500ms
500ms
500ms
T3168
Data_In_PCU
500ms
500ms
500ms
Network Operation
Mode
Data_In_PCU
Network
Network Operation Network Operation
Operation Mode
Mode II
Mode II
II
Description
This parameter specifies the layer where a cell is located. The network designed by
Huawei has four layers: Pico, Micro, Macro, and Umbrella, numbered 1-4 respectively.
The Pico layer is a microcell layer on the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands. It m
This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC), for example, the MCC of China
is 460.
This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC).
This parameter specifies the network color code, which is provided by the telecom
operator. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. The NCC is unique
nationwide.
The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC).
This parameter specifies the base station color code. The BCC identifies the cells with
the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC.
This parameter specifies the handover between the cells at the same layer.
If this parameter is set to a small value, the priority is high. Generally, the cells at the
same layer have the same priority.
For details, refer to Layer of the Cell.
This parameter specifies the activation status of a cell. The activation status can be Not
Activated or Activated.
This parameter specifies the number of the PCU that is connected to the E1 link on the
Pb interface.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a
cell. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. In addition, a packet control unit (PCU)
must be configured on the BSS side, and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus
The parameter specifies whether the PCU supports baseband FH and EDGE
simultaneously.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. Compared with
GSM, EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The enhanced data rates for GSM
evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS, which
improv
This parameter specifies the power attenuation level of a timeslot when 8PSK is used by
an EDGE-enabled TRX. The attenuation value has 50 levels. Each level attenuates by 0.2
dB.
The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits
This parameter specifies whether the cell support the Network Assisted Cell Change
(NACC) function.
In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is in the packet transmission
mode, the network informs the MS of the system information about neighb
This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the PACKET SI STATUS procedure.
When the cell is configured with the PBCCH, the MS sends the Packet PSI/SI Status
message to the BSC, indicating that the MS has stored the system message. The BSC
sends th
This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Network Control 2 (NC2)
function.
In NC2, the MS reports the measurement report of the reference cell and neighbor cells
to the BSC. The BSC controls cell reselection (including normal reselections a
This parameter specifies whether the PCU supports 64 neighbor cells.
In the NACC and NC2 functions, this parameter affects the ability of the BSC to report
the number of neighbor cells.
For the BTS3002C, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+,BTS22C and BTS20, the default value is
Invalid and cannot be manually modified. That is, the main and diversity level cannot be
reported. For other types of BTSs, the default value is Support and can be manually
modif
This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. Each new cell can be
allocated frequencies of only one frequency band. Once the frequency band is selected,
it cannot be changed.
GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band.
DCS1800: The cell
This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state
performs location management based on the routing area.
Each routing area has an ID. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message.
For example, value 0 indic
This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Dual Transfer Mode (DTM)
function. The DTM function enables an MS to provide both the CS service and the PS
service at the same time. The function requires the support of the BSC.
This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the enhanced DTM function.
Compared with the DTM function, the enhanced DTM function enhances the CS setup
and release. When the CS service is set up, the PS service is not disrupted.
This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side.
The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit
to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A
If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell
where the TRX serves does not perform FH. FH can be used to average the interferen

comparing the TA and the value
This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to
implement the extended cell.
A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay.
Theoretically, TA equals 219, that is, a delay of about 120
This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function.
In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are
transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position
or t
This parameter specifies whether the enhanced concentric cell handover is allowed in a
concentric cell.
If the cell supports the enhanced concentric cell function, compare the receive level of
the MS with OtoU HO Received Level Threshold and with UtoO HO
This parameter specifies whether a cell is a normal cell or a concentric cell.
TRXs in a concentric cell differ in coverage; thus, two subcells with different radiuses
form a concentric cell.
Due to the difference in coverage, the OL subcell and the UL
This parameter specifies whether a cell is the OL subcell or the UL subcell. This
parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.
This parameter specifies whether the main BCCH is configured in the OL subcell or the
UL subcell.
In the scenario of the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency
reuse of the OL subcell, this parameter is set to Underlaid Subcell.
In
This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by
tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may
drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For
details. see GSM Rec. 05.08.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47
dBm).
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving
an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an
SDCCH when receiving an initial access request.
network. It is n
This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed.

When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly, many subscribers may
fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. In this case, the TCHs
(includi
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power
amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.
This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power
amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.
This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC.
This parameter specifies the TRX number, which must be unique in one BTS.
The following two points should be paid attention to:
1. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board, This parameter specifies
the TRX number in a cabinet. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E, the TRX
numbers may be discontinuous.
2. If the logical TRX is separated from the physical board, one-to-one mapping between
them
is notmust
mandatory.
Cell Index
be unique in one BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. The value of
this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047.
Internal 2G cells: 0-2047
This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in
a BSC.
This parameter is used to differentiate boards with unique identifiers in the BTS.
This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS, not-activated and activated.
This parameter specifies the Abis mode of OML.

The default value is calculated automatically, that is, the BSC assigns the Abis time slot
of OML automatically.
This parameter specifies the number of a cabinet.
This parameter specifies the number of a subrack.
This parameter specifies the number of the slot where a board is located.
This parameter specifies the terminal equipment identifier on the link layer.
This parameter is used to identify multiple signaling links on the same physical link
when the LAPDs are multiplexed on the highway timeslot.
This parameter specifies the number of the TC subrack where the GEIUT/GOIUT is
located.
This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GEIUT or GOIUT is located in
the TC subrack, which is connected to the local subrack.
This parameter specifies the out-BSC port number on the interface board used by the
semi-permanent link.
When the semi-permanent link is configured on the electrical interface board, each
electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to
31.
When
the semi-permanent
is configured
on the timeslot
optical interface
optical
This
parameter
specifies thelink
number
of the out-BSC
occupiedboard,
by theeach
E1 port
interface
board
is configured with 63 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 62.
over the Abis
interface.
The bandwidth of each E1 is divided into 32 timeslots. Generally, timeslot 0 is used for
synchronization and cannot be otherwise used.
The E1 timeslot is numbered by 8 kbit/s, and the range is 0-255.For example, 0-3
specifies the first to the fourth 8 kbit/s sub-timeslot of the first 64 kbit/s timeslot.
Accordingly, the timeslot numbering is likewise.
If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port
occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface.
If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the
timeslot occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface.
This parameter specifies the logical link number of the LAPD link (corresponding to the
RSL link) in the BSC. When the BTS works in ring topology, the forward and reverse links
share one number.
Each LAPD link is uniquely numbered in one BSC.
If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell
where
the TRX serves
does
perform
FH. The
FH
average
interference
and
This parameter
specifies
thenot
transmit
power
level
ofcan
therealize
TRX. The
greater
this
frequency
parameter diversity.
is, the smaller the transmit power is.
When this parameter is set to 0, the transmit power level of the TRX is the greatest.
Each time this parameter increases by one level, the transmit power reduces by 2 dB.
For different types of BTSs, the value range of this parameter is different.
BTS3X: 0-10
BTS3001C: 0-13
BTS3002C: 0-10
Double-transceiver BTSs (BTS3012BTS3012AEBTS3006C): 0-10
DBS3900
GSM, BTS3900
GSM,
BTS3900A
This
parameter
specifies the
power
levels GSM0-10
supported by a TRX. The macro BTS and the
mini BTS support different power levels.
This parameter specifies the concentric attribute of a cell. For a concentric cell, this
parameter is set to UL subcell or OL subcell according to actual conditions; if the cell is
not a concentric one, this parameter is set to None by default.
This parameter specifies the TRX priority. It is used for Huawei II channel assignment
algorithm.
This parameter specifies whether to turn off the power amplifier of the TRX
automatically
for
saving power
when
thecan
BTS
is powered
by batteries
the
external
This parameter
specifies
whether
a cell
convert
full rate
channels after
to half
rate
power
supply
is cut off.
channels,
or convert
the half rate channels to full rate channels.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the conversion is allowed; if the parameter is set to No,
the conversion is not allowed. the TCHF that has been converted to the TCHH will be
forcedly restored; the TCHH that has been converted to the TCHF will be forcedly
restored.
This parameter also specifies whether the channel supports the dynamic adjustment
priority in the channel assignment algorithm. In the channel assignment, the channels
on the TRX not supporting the dynamic adjustment are assigned first, to ensure the
This
parameter
the power
levels of the
TRX.
There are 50
channels
on thespecifies
TRX supporting
theattenuation
dynamic adjustment
areEDGE
used for
dynamic
levels,
and the
attenuation
between
levels
is 0.2are
dB.satisfied.
adjustment.
Thus,
the access
requests
of users
The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits GMSK
signals. Thus, this parameter needs to be set to meet the frequency requirements.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the wireless link alarm parameter to
the BTS. If the parameter is set to Yes, the wireless link alarm parameter is sent;
otherwise, the wireless link alarm parameter is not sent.
This parameter specifies the statistics base of a sub-channel (the statistical times that a
sub-channel that is activated). B (the statistics base of a sub-channel on a timeslot) x N
(the number of sub-channels on a timeslot) = S (the total times that channels on a
timeslot that are activated).
For the latest S times of channel activation, if the percentage of abnormally released
channels exceeds Abnormal Warn Threshold, an alarm is generated.
If the percentage of abnormally released channels is less than or equal to Abnormal
Release Threshold, the BSC sends the corresponding recovery alarm.
If the percentage of abnormally released channels exceeds the total successful channel
activation threshold of a timeslot, an abnormally release alarm is generated.
If the percentage of abnormally released channel in the total successful channel

activation is less than or equal to this threshold, an abnormal release clear alarm is
sent.
If the duration of continuous (not accumulated) no-traffic reaches this threshold, the notraffic alarm is generated.
This parameter specifies whether a critical wireless link alarm is sent.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS sends a critical wireless link alarm if the wireless
link prompt alarm is not cleared during the period specified by WLA Prompting Recover
Period.
If the radio link prompt alarm is cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the
corresponding recovery alarm is sent by the BTS. If the radio link prompt alarm is not
cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the critical wireless link alarm is sent or
not sent according to the settings of the parameter Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit.
The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in
each day. Starting from the period specified by this parameter, the BTS detects the
wireless link alarm, and sends an alarm related.
The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in
each day. Until the end of the period specified by this parameter, the BTS stops
detecting the wireless link alarm and sending the alarm related. The detection starts
again
until the next
Beginthe
Time
of WLA
Detection(hour).
This parameter
specifies
basic
difference
value caused by the specified level
difference between the uplink channel and the downlink channel. Together with Up
Down Balance Floating Range, this parameter is used to calculate the number of uplink
and downlink unbalance.
Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm
Threshold is set to 30. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power
This
parameter
specifies
the permissible
uplink
andthan
downlink
floating
range
control
compensation
is greater
than 8+30
or less
8-30, balance
the uplink
and the
relative
Upnot
Down
Balanceotherwise,
Basic Difference.
Theand
uplink
and downlink
is not balanced
downlinktoare
balanced;
the uplink
downlink
are balanced.
only when the uplink and downlink level exceeds the Up Down Balance Floating Range.
Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm
Threshold is set to 30. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power
control compensation is greater than 8+30 or less than 8-30, the uplink and the
downlink are not balanced; otherwise, the uplink and downlink are balanced.
When the percentage of the uplink-and-downlink balance measurement reports in the
total valid measurement reports is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter,
the uplink and downlink unbalance alarm is generated.
This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU.
The RF receive mode can be Not Support, Independent Receiver, Dividing Receiver, Four
Diversity
Receiver,
or Main
This parameter
specifies
theDiversity.
RF transmit mode of the TRX.
The
BTS3012,
BTS3012AE,
BTS3012II,
BTS3006C,
and BTS3002E
do not support
Main
The RF transmit mode can be
Not Support,
No Combining,
Power Booster
Technology,
Diversity.
Wide Band Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY, DPBT, or Transmitter
The DBS3900orGSM
and BTS3900 GSM support Four Diversity Receiver and Main
Independent
Combining.
Diversity.
The BTS3006C and BTS3002E support No Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY
and DPBT.
The DBS3900 GSM GRRU supports No Combining, Diversity Transmitter and
DDIVERSITY.
The BTS3900 GSM and BTS3900A GSM support No Combining, Power Booster
Technology, Wide Band Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY and DPBT.
The BTS3012 supports No Combining, Power Booster Technology, Power Booster
This
parameter
specifies
whether the
BSC determines
to enable or disable the power
Technology,
Diversity
Transmitter,
DDIVERSITY
and DPBT.
amplifier
a included
TRX based
on the
volume.
The BTSs of
not
above
dotraffic
not support
the RF tranmsit modes listed above.
This parameter specifies the following: When the antenna hopping function is used, the
signals of one TRX can switch between different antennas instead of one TRX
corresponding to one antenna. Therefore, the signals on certain frequencies are less
affected
by Rayleigh
fading
those without
antenna
hopping.
The
Antenna
This
parameter
specifies
thecompared
following: with
Currently,
when the
BSC performs
the
static
Hopping
Indexon
corresponds
to step
a TRX
power control
the TRX, the
ofnumber.
increasing or reducing the power of the TRX is 2
dB. In some scenarios, the TRX has different losses if it is combined on different
tributaries, and the output power difference before and after the combination is not an
integral multiple of 2 dB. Thus, the cabinet top output power of the BTS cannot be
This
parameter
specifies
whether
the
TRX
supports
antenna
adjusted
in the step
of 2 dB,
so the
TRX
output
power
may behopping.
different from the cabinet
In
GSM cell,
the of
frequency,
topa output
power
the BTS. frame number, system information, and paging group are
transmitted
on the BCCH
of the of
main
TRX. Ifathe
MSstep
is incan
an be
unfavorable
position
Therefore, through
the setting
thisBCCH
parameter,
finer
provided for
or
the antenna
for thetop
main
BCCH
TRX is
then the MS cannot receive the
adjusting
the cabinet
output
power
offaulty,
the BTS.
broadcast control messages from the main BCCH TRX properly.
The antenna hopping function enables the data on all the timeslots of the BCCH TRX to
be transmitted on the antennas of all the TRXs in the cell in turn. Thus the quality of the
BCCH TRX data received by the MS is improved and the network performance is
This
parameter
the number of BTS
the out-BSC
slot wherewith
the BSC
interfacehopping
board
enhanced.
Only specifies
the double-transceiver
can be configured
the antenna
is
located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the slot that
function.
holds the interface board, which connects the BTS to the BSC.
This parameter can be modified according to the actual requirements. However, it must
This
parameter
specifies
theslot
number
ofconfigured
the out-BSC
port
where
the BSC
interface board
be set
to the number
of the
that is
with
the
interface
board.
is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the port on
the interface board that connects the BTS to the BSC.
When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the electrical interface board, each
electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to
31.
When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the optical interface board, each optical
interface board is configured with 63 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 62.
If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the RSL
timeslot on the GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB port.
If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port
occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface.
If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the
timeslot occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface.
This parameter specifies the transmission bearer mode of a TRX: 0-TDM, 1-HDLC, 2HDLC_HUB, or 3-IP.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a TRX.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of Abis timeslots occupied by the PDCHs
on a TRX.
This parameter specifies the number of the TRX that supports the PBT together with the
current TRX. When this parameter is set to the default value 255, you can infer that no
TRX supports the PBT together with the current TRX.
This parameter specifies the index of the in-BTS HDLC channel. The in-BTS HDLC
channel connects to the BTS TMU.
This parameter specifies the index of an HDLC channel between the PEU and the PTU.
This parameter specifies the unique number of a TRX in the HUB domain in HUB HDLC
transmission mode.
This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GXPUM (processing the RSL
signaling) is located.
This parameter specifies the priority of the clock reference source.
This parameter specifies the HDLC channel index of reverse link in an HDLC ring
network.
This parameter specifies the allowed power difference between the maximum output
power of the QTRU and the maximum nominal output power.
This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power
amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power
amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.

comparing the TA and the value of this parameter.

This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side.
The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit
to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A5/4,
A5/5, A5/6, and A5/7 encryption algorithms respectively. If a bit is set to 1, you can infer
that the BSS supports the corresponding encryption algorithm. If a bit is 0, you can infer
that the BSS does not support the corresponding encryption algorithm.
The eights bits cannot be all zeros and the least significant bit must be 1.
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed.

network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. If directed retry is
preformed frequently in a local network, you must adjust the TRX configuration of the
BTS and the network layout.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving
an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an
SDCCH when receiving an initial access request.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For
details. see GSM Rec. 05.08.
dBm).
This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by
tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may
drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the
call. The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful
or if the subscriber hooks on.
This parameter specifies: for the channel assignment, suppose the MS supports multiple
sub frequency bands of the 900 MHz frequency band. The BSC ignores the priority of PGSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands if the cell load is smaller than and equal to this
threshold. The BSC assigns channels on the TRXs with priority of R-GSM, E-GSM, P-GSM
frequency bands if the cell load is greater than this threshold. That is, the BSC
preferentially assigns channels on the R-GSM TRXs if the MS supports P-GSM/E-GSM/RGSM parameter
sub frequency
bands and
thethe
cellchannel
is configured
with TRXs
operating
This
determines
when
is assigned
on the
QTRU: on the PGSM/E-GSM/R-GSM
frequency
bands.
When the channel issub
assigned
on the
QTRU board by using the dynamic power sharing
algorithm, and when the remaining power of QTRU board is less than the call required
power of cell,
If this switch is set to Yes, this is allowed to assign the channel; otherwise, this is not
allowed to assign the channel.
The value of this parameter should be added in estimated power when the downlink
path loss is estimated by the uplink path loss.
This parameter specifies the downlink signal strength estimated by the QTRU power
sharing algorithm together with downlink power control target threshold.The value of
this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
The P/N criterion determines whether the statistics time of QTRU downlink power is
insufficient. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
This parameter specifies the following definitions:
1. The QTRU power sharing algorithm is disabled.
The
P/N criterion
determines
whether the observation time of QTRU downlink power is
2. Static
power sharing
algorithm.
insufficient.
This parameter
corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
3. Dynamic power
sharing algorithm.
The difference between static power sharing algorithm and dynamic power sharing
algorithm is that the dynamic power sharing algorithm uses the MCPA power sharing
technology, the static power specification is different from dynamic power specification.
When there are several carriers, the maximum output power of single carrier in dynamic
power specification is greater.
In the network swapping, the static/dynamic power on the top of cabinet needs to
If
the uplink
received
level difference
ofthe
calls
in of
the
same timeslot
exceeds
the
compare
with
the competitor
power on
top
cabinet.
If the static
power
on the top
Threshold
the difference
between
the power
situation
must algorithm
be
of cabinet of
competitor
power
on theuplink
top ofreceived
cabinet, levels,
the static
sharing
recorded.
During
the observation
of Ptop
seconds,
if this
lasts
N seconds,
theof
call
is used; if the
dynamic
power on the
of cabinet
situation
competitor
power
on the top
with
thelowest
in the timeslot
should
be handed
to another
cabinet
staticuplink
powersignal
on thestrength
top of cabinet,
the dynamic
power
sharingover
algorithm
is
timeslot.
used.
If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the
Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be
recorded. During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, the call
with the lowest uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another
timeslot.
The value is 0-1 in fact; however, the data in the host and BSC should be simultaneously
multiplied
by 10specifies
times to the
prevent
floating-point
values. that is, the BSC monitors the
This parameter
QTRUthe
signal
merge algorithm,
high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5 second.
If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot the lowest uplink signal strength of
this timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation
must be recorded.
During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, a forced handover
is initiated on the calls with the highest uplink signal strength in the timeslot, and the
calls should be handed over to another timeslot.
P specifies the Observed time of uplink received level difference, and N specifies the
Duration of uplink received level difference.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC is allowed to assign the half-rate channels
and full-rate channels to the MS according to the channel seizure ratio of the underlaid
subcell and overlaid subcell.
The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. If the
channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, halfrate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned.
Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available
TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%. This parameter is valid for the concentric
The
assigns
channels
in the overlaid
to the MS in a concentric
cell.isIfset
theto
cell. BSC
When
the Allow
Rate Selection
Basedsubcell
on Overlaid/Underlaid
Subcell Load
channel
ratioBusy
of overlaid
subcell
greaterfor
than
value of cell.
this parameter, halfYes, the seizure
TCH Traffic
Threshold
(%) is invalid
thethe
concentric
rate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned.
Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available
TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%.
This parameter is valid for the concentric cell. When the Allow Rate Selection Based on
Overlaid/Underlaid
Subcell
Load isthe
setdynamic
to Yes, the
TCH
Traffic Busy
This
parameter specifies
whether
HSN
is permitted
to Threshold
be used. (%) is
invalid
for frequency
the concentric
cell. function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell,
When the
hopping
this parameter is set to YES. Thus, the inter-frequency interference among channels can
be reduced.
Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES, this parameter can be configured.
This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO.
In tight frequency resuse, the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel
interference among channels occur.
When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell,
the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially.
In the case of aggressive frequency reuse, the recommended value is set to Yes.
This parameter specifies the static Abis resource load threshold. When the static Abis
resource load is lower than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%), the full-rate
channel is preferentially assigned. Otherwise, the full-rate or half-rate channel is
preferred according to the dynamic Abis resource load.
When the static Abis resource load is higher than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load
Thred(%) and the dynamic Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis
Load Thred(%), the half-rate channel is preferred. Otherwise, the full-rate channel is
preferred.
This parameter specifies when the BSC fails to convert the dynamic PDCH back to the
TCH, this operation is not performed during the period specified by this parameter. The
parameter
is type
validto
forbeboth
built-in
and according
external PCU.
The
channel
assigned
is PCH
decided
to the channel types that are
allowed by the MSC and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell.
During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels are required in
the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by
the MSC, the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes, and the percentage of seized TCHs
in the cell is greater than the value of AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold. In other
cases,
the TCHFspecifies
or TCCH,whether
TCHF Prior
required. assigned on the basis of
This parameter
thechannels
TCH/H is are
preferentially
For channel
details about
cell current
load levels,
refer
to the Cell
Load
Threshold.
the
type and
service
channel
seizure
ratio
that are allowed by the MSC.
Relevant
AMR call channel
assignment
During
thealgorithm:
channel assignment,
the TCHF
or TCCH,algorithms
TCHH Prior channels are required in
the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by
The
updating
of the
history
record
starts
Period
of CH Record
times
the MSC,
the AMR
TCH/H
Prior
Allowed
is when
set to the
Yes,Update
and the
percentage
of seized
TCHs
out.
Update
of CH
Record
is subtracted
from the
priority
of eachIn
channel
in the
cell is Freq
greater
than
the value
of AMR TCH/H
Priorhistory
Cell Load
Threshold.
other to
improve
the
priority
of theTCHF
channel.
cases, the
TCHF
or TCCH,
Prior channels are required.
Principles
takingPeriod
values
follows:
When the of
Update
ofare
CH as
Record
expires, the process of updating the history
Generally,
set thisoccupancy
parameteristostarted.
2.
record
of channel
That is, the history priority of each channel is
If a fixedby
interference
source
orat
anthe
equipment
fault
update
frequency
reduced
Update Freq.of
CHexists
Record
interval of
theoccurs,
settingthe
value
of this
for
the affected
cells can
set to 4priority.
or 6.
parameter
to increase
thebe
channel
The Update
Period values
of CH Record
used together with Update Freq of CH Record, In this
Principles
of taking
are as is
follows:
way,
the
channel
can
be
assigned
even
channel
priority isthe
continuously
lowered
Generally, a high-frequency adjustmentifisthe
used.
For example,
update period
should
within
time.
be set a
inperiod
such aof
way
that it ranges from half an hour to one hour because several busy
hours are the major concerns during the actual operation in a day. If the parameter is
set to a too small value, the result of the history record is meaningless. If the parameter
is
setparameter
to a too great
value,
the
result cannot
be seen inreports
time during
busy
hours.
This
specifies
the
number
of measurement
that are
used
to
If a fixed interference
sourceon
exists
or anchannels.
equipment fault occurs, the update period for
determine
the signal quality
signaling
the affected
cells can
be set in channels
such a way
that it
ranges
from several
hours
one
day.
The
signal quality
on signaling
should
not
be determined
based
on to
only
one
This parameter
is used
Freq.
of CH Record
so that
channel
measurement
result.
To together
eliminatewith
the Update
influence
of accidental
factors,
youthe
need
to obtain
can
be assigned
even
if the quality
history in
record
priority
decreases.
the average
value
of signal
several
successive
measurement reports of
signaling channels, and then determine the signal quality on signaling channels.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the
signal strength on the SDCCH.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to clculate
the signal quality on speech/data TCHs.
The signal quality on TCHs should not be determined based on only one measurement
result. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors, you need to obtain the average
value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of TCHs, and then
determine the signal quality on speech/data TCHs.
speech/data TCH signal strength.
This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink
interference is existed.
The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower
the signal quality is.
If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level
This
parameter
specifies
of the
thresholds
to determine
whether
the downlink
Threshold
and the
qualityone
grade
of the
uplink channel
is greater
or equal
to the value
interference
is existed.
Interf of DL Qual
Threshold. The downlink interference occurs.
The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower
the signal quality is.
If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level
Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value
This
oneThe
of the
thresholds
to determine
whether the uplink
Interfparameter
of DL Qualspecifies
Threshold.
downlink
interference
occurs.
interference
is existed.
The value range
of Rank 0-63 corresponds to the range of -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
The higher the level, the greater the signal is. The greater the value, the lower the
quality is.
If the
uplink channel
level
is greater
than or equal
to the value
of Interf
UL level
This
parameter
specifies
one
of the thresholds
to determine
whether
theofuplink
Threshold
and
quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value
interference
is the
existed.
Interf
of UL the
Qual
Threshold.
The uplink
interference
occurs.the value, the lower the
The higher
level,
the greater
the signal
is. The greater
quality is.
If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level
Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value
Interf of UL Qual Threshold.this indicates the signal is good, but the quality is poor, that
This
parameter
specifies whether
is, the
uplink interference
occurs. the history record priority is considered in channel
assignment.
The value range of Rank 0-63 corresponds to the range of -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
If this parameter is set to YES, the history record priority is effective. If this parameter is
set to NO, the history record priority is ineffective.
Usually this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high history record
priority
preferentially.
This parameter
specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel
assignment.
If this parameter is set to YES, the TRX priority factor is effective. If this parameter is set
to NO, the TRX priority factor is ineffective.
Usually, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority
This parameter specifies whether the channel interference is considered in channel
preferentially.
assignment.
If this parameter is set to NO, the channel interference measurement is not performed
and the interference indication is not sent. If this parameter is set to YES, the channel
interference measurement is performed.
If this parameter is set to YES, the channel with little interference is selected
preferentially.
This parameter specifies whether the interference priority is considered during channel
assignment.
By default, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with little interference.
In Huawei II channel assignment algorithm, if the current channel seizure ratio reaches
or exceeds this value, the half-rate TCH is assigned preferentially; otherwise, the fullrate TCH is assigned preferentially.
This parameter specifies whether to turn on the switch for the tight BCCH algorithm, and
thus controls whether to enable the BCCH aggressive frequency reuse algorithm.
Yes: Open
No: Close
This
whether
current
cell supports
the
dynamic These
transmission
This parameter
parameter specifies
sets the priority
ofthe
different
types
in channel
allocation.
types
diversity or dynamic PBT:
include:
0:
not supported
Capacity
with a higher priority
1:
dynamic
diversity supported
Quality
withtransmission
a higher priority
2: dynamic
PBT supported
PS
coordination
with a relatively higher priority
PS coordination with an absolutely higher priority

The priority of different types is as follows:
Priority by capacity: capacity factors > quality factors > PS cooperation factors >
management factors
Priority
by quality:
quality
factors the
> capacity
factors
PShalf-rate
cooperation
> fullThis
parameter
specifies
whether
combination
of >
two
TCHsfactors
into one
management
factorsin a cell.
rate TCH is allowed
priority by
PS to
domain:
factors > and
PS cooperation
factorsby
> timeslot
quality
IfRelative
this parameter
is set
No, thecapacity
forced handover
call delay caused
factors
> management
factorsbut there may cause some TCHF-only calls to fail because
arrangement
can be avoided,
Absolute
priority
by PS domain:
PS cooperation factors > capacity factors > quality
the
timeslot
arrangement
is unavailable.
factors
> management
This
parameter
specifies
minimum
time
thethe
recovery
of a
TCH from anfails
SDCCH.
If this
parameter
is set factors
tothe
Yes,
calls may
failfor
when
timeslot
arrangement
and
The
processing
for not
the select
SDCCHthe
recovered
TCH is ascell.
follows: each cell is configured
when
the MS does
TCHF in to
thethe
concentric
with a counter. Each time the TCH is converted to the SDCCH, the counter is set to
ResTime. The value of the counter is adjusted every three seconds. If the number of idle
SDCCHs > 8 + N1, the counter descreases by 3; if the number of idle SDCCHs < 8 + Idle
SDCCH Threshold N1, the counter increases by 12 within the setting value; if the
number of idle SDCCHs = 8 + N1, the counter remains unchanged. If the value of the
counter
is BSC
equal
to or lowerwhether
than 0 after
adjustment,
the SDCCH
is the
converted
When the
determines
to initiate
the conversion
from
TCH to to
thethe TCH.
SDCCH, it needs to determine whether the number of SDCCHs after the conversion
exceeds
the Cell
SDCCH
Channel
Maximum.
If the than
number
of SDCCHs
If the number
of idle
SDCCHs
in the
cell is smaller
or equal
to the exceeds
value of the
thisvalue
of
this parameter,
the
BSC
not
initiate
parameter,
the BSC
tries
todoes
find a
TCHF
thatthe
canconversion.
be converted to the SDCCH.
This parameter specifies one of the conditions for converting the TCHF to the SDCCH.
Besides this parameter, the other three conditions for initiating the conversion from
TCHFs to SDCCHs are as follows:
1.The cell allows the SDCCH dynamic adjustment.
2.(Number of idle TCHFs + number of idle TCHHs/2) 4 or the number of TRXs in the
cell, and the cell must have at least one idle TCHF.
3.The
sum of the
numberthe
of SDCCHs
in the
cell plus
is smaller
thanwhen
the maximum
This parameter
specifies
coding rate
adopted
oneight
a half-rate
channel
a call is
number
of
SDCCHs
allowed
in
the
cell.
initially established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have
four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in
the
ACS
Based
onrespectively.
the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
adjustment hysteresis
between
coding
Based on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based
on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based
on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
the
current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
the
rates.
This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a
set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech
coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is
1, the coding rate is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the
coding rate. The value of this parameter has five bits.
This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a full-rate channel when a call is
initially established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have
four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in
the
ACS
Based
onrespectively.
the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based
on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based
on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
the
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
the
adjustment
threshold
and
anmeasurement
between
coding
Based on the
RQI in the
call
report, the
BTS andthe
MSneighboring
automatically
adjust
rates.
rates.
This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a
set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech
coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is
1, the coding rate is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the
coding rate. The value of this parameter has eight bits.
This
parameter
specifies
the maximum
number of
reassignments
after the
assignment
In normal
assignment
procedure,
after receiving
the
assignment failure
message
from
on
the
Um
interface
fails.
the MS on the SDCCH, the BSC does not report the message to the MSC immediately.
Instead, the BSC re-assigns radio channels and re-originates the assignment on the Um
interface. Thus the success rate of assignment can be increased.
Reassigning radio channels can be performed in the carriers with the same frequency
band or of different frequency bands.
If this parameter is set to Same Band, the frequency band of the preferentially
reassigned channel is the same as what is used before the reassignment.
If the parameter is set to Different Band, the frequency band of the preferentially
reassigned channel is different from what is used before the reassignment.
This
whether
to disable
the sending of
short
You parameter
can set thisspecifies
parameter
to improve
the deterioration
of point-to-point
QoS caused by
the
messages.
In carrier
specificchannel
cells, sending
short messages on the downlink is
interference,
fault, orpoint-to-point
engineering fault.
disabled to ensure sufficient radio channels for calls.
The channel activation and immediate assignment commands are sent at the same time
to accelerate the signaling processing rate, thus improving the response speed of the
network.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the Abis resource adjustment TCHH
function.
This parameter determines whether the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to an
MS when the Abis resources are insufficient.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to the
MS if the Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%) or
than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%).
This parameter specifies whether to allow the enhanced multi-level precedence and
preemption (eMLPP) function. In eMLPP, the network can use different policies such as
queuing, preemption, and directed retry based on the priorities of different calls when
network resources are occupied.
If the Allow EMLPP is set to Yes, when preemption occurs, the MS with the lowest
priority performs handover, and the MS with higher priority seizes the idle channel after
handover. If the Allow EMLPP is set to No, a certain MS with lower priority releases the
channel, the MS with higher priority seizes the idle channel after release.
This parameter specifies whether to allow the reassignment function.
This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a TDD cell
is valid.
The measurement report is valid if the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement
report is greater than the value of this parameter.
After the valid measurement report is filtered, the TDD cell joins in the cell prioritization.
0: 0 dB
1:
6 dB
This
parameter specifies the signal level offset of a TDD cell.
... the value of this parameter to the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement
Add
6:
36 dBand then sequence the TDD cells.
report,
7:
0:
0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
7: 42 dB
This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN TDD cells that should be contained in the
best cell list or in the measurement report.
A TDD cell can become a candidate cell only when the average receive level of the TDD
cell is greater than the TDD Cell Reselect Diversity of the serving cell.
0: - (always select a cell if acceptable)
1:
-28
dB
This
parameter
specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about an FDD
2: -24
dB
cell
is valid.
...
If the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of
15:
dB
this 28
parameter,
the measurement report is valid.
After the valid measurement report is filtered, the 3G cell joins in the cell priority
sequence.
0: 0 dB
This
parameter specifies the signal level offset of an FDD cell.
1: 6 dB
When
the priority of a 3G cell is sequenced, it is recommended that the value of this
...
parameter
6: 36 dB be added to the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report.
0:
7: 0
dB
1: 6 parameter
dB
This
specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a
DCS1800 cell is valid.

...
If the receive level of the 1800 MHz cell in the measurement report is greater than the
7:
42 dB
value
of this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the measurement report
is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority sequence.
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
This
... parameter specifies the signal level offset of a DCS1800 cell.
When
sequencing the priority of a DCS1800 cell based on its frequency band, the value
6: 36 dB
of
7: this
parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report.
0: 0 dB
This
specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a GSM900
1: 6 parameter
dB
cell
... is valid.
When
the receive level of the GSM900 cell in the measurement report is greater than
7: 42 dB
the value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the measurement
report is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority rank.
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
This
level offset
a GSM900
cell.
...
This parameter
parameter specifies
specifies the
the signal
level threshold
forof
cell
reselection
in connection mode.
When
the priority
of aif GSM900
cell
is sequenced
on the
of its
band,
the
6: connection
36 dB
In
mode,
the signal
level
in the serving
cellbasis
is below
[0,frequency
7] or above
[8, 15],
value
of
this
parameter
should
be
added
to
the
receive
level
in
the
measurement
report.
7:
the MS starts to search for 3G cells.

0:
dB
For0example:
6 dB
If1:this
parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the
... starts to search for 3G cells.
MS
7:
42 dB
If this
parameter is set to 10 and if the signal level of the serving cell is higher than 10,
0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
...
6: -74 dBm
7: (always)
8: -78 dBm
9: -74 dBm ...
14: -54 dBm
15: (never)
This parameter indicates that when the MS reports the EMR, it adds the value of this
parameter to the received signal level, and then converts the result into the RXLEV
value. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 10 dBm, level values 0-63 map with -100 dBm
to -37 dBm.
If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 0 dBm, level values 0-63 map with -110 dBm
to -47 dBm.
If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is Automatic, the MS chooses the least SCALE
while ensuring that the MS can report the most strong level.
This parameter specifies whether the EMR can contain the information about a cell with
an invalid BSIC.
This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in packet
transfer mode.
In packet transfer mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8,
15],
MS starts
to search
for 3Gthe
cells.
This the
parameter
specifies
whether
MS is allowed to search for a 3G cell when the
For
BSICexample:
must be decoded.
If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the
MS starts to search for 3G cells.
If this parameter is set to 10 and if the signal level of the serving cell is higher than 10,
This
parameter
specifies one threshold of the signal level for 3G cell reselection.
0: -98
dBm
Only
1: -94when
dBm the receive level of a 3G cell is greater than FDD Qmin, the 3G cell can be
one
... candidate cell for cell reselection.
0:-74
-20dBm
dB
6:
1:
dB
7: -6
(always)
2:
8: -18
-78 dB
dBm
3:
9: -8
-74dB
dBm
4:
... -16 dB
5:
14:-10
-54dB
dBm
6:
dB
15:-14
(never)
7:
-12
dB.
This
parameter
specifies the number of UTRAN FDD cells that should be contained in the
Default
dB.measurement report.
best
cellvalue:
list or -20
in the
This parameter specifies the measurement report counter of an FDD cell.

Only when the average receive level of a 3G cell is FDD Q Offset greater than that of the
serving cell, the 3G cell becomes a candidate cell.
0: -parameter
(always select
a cellthe
if acceptable)
This
specifies
level threshold for cell reselection in idle mode.
1:
-28 dB
In idle
mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8, 15], the MS
2: -24 to
dBsearch for 3G cells.
starts
example:
For
15:
28parameter
dB
If this
is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the
MS starts to search for 3G cells.
This
parameter
specifies
threshold
the signal
cell reselection
in than 10,
If this parameter is set tothe
10 and
if the of
signal
level oflevel
the for
serving
cell is higher
connection
mode
before
Qsearch
C
is
obtained.
0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
2: -90 dBm
3: -86 dBm
4:
-82system
dBm information indicates "MBR", the MS reports the number of neighbor cells
If the
5: -78
dBm frequency bands.
on
different
6:
-74 the
dBmMS reports the number of neighbor cells on the same frequency band with the
When
7(always),
is, the MS
keeps
searching
for 3G
cells
serving cell, athat
maximum
of the
value
of Serving
Band
Reporting can be reported.
8: -78 dBm
These
neighbor cells must meet the following requirements:
9:
-74 dBm
1. The
receive levels of the neighbor cells must be higher than 900 Reporting Threshold
10:
-70 dBm
or 1800
Reporting Threshold.
11:The
-66BSIC
dBmof a neighbor cell must be valid.
2.
12:
-62signals
dBm of the neighbor cells must be the strongest among all the neighbor cells
3.
The
When
Deviation Indication is set to Yes, the transmit power of an MS is the MS
13:
-58Power
dBm frequency
on
the
same
band.
maximum
transmit power
level plus the power calculated from the power deviation if
14: -54 dBm
the
class
3
MS
on
the
DCS1800
band
not for
receive
the original power command after
15(never), that is, the MS does
notdoes
search
3G cells
random access. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
The MS does not receive the original power command after random access. This
parameter indicates whether the power deviation is added to the class 3 MS on the
DCS1800 band on the basis of the maximum MS transmit power.
This parameter is used for the MS to report neighbor cell explanation of multiple bands.
It is sent in the system information 2ter and 5ter.
The early classmark sending control (ECSC) specifies whether the MSs in a cell use early
classmark sending. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08.After a successful immediate
assignment, the MS sends additional classmark information to the network as early as
possible. The CM3 (classmark 3) information contains the power information of each
band
of multi-band
MSs. In
the an
inter-band
handover,
power
class
be correctly
This parameter
specifies
when
MS disconnects
a call
if the
MS must
unsuccessfully
described.
When
paging
is
made
or
the
BA2
table
is
sent
between
different
bands,
decodes the SACCH message. For details of this parameter, see GSM Rec. 0408
andthe
CM3
message must be known. For dual-band MSs, if ECSC is set to No, the MSC sends a
05.08.
CLASSMARK
REQUEST
message
after the
MS MS,
reports
an EST IND
Thethe
MSinitial
then
Once a dedicated
channel
is assigned
to the
the counter
S is message.
enabled and
reports
UPDATE
message. The connection time of the MS is affected.
value
is the
set CLASSMARK
to this parameter
value.
Each time an SACCH message is not decoded, the counter S decreases by 1. Each time
an SACCH message is correctly decoded, the counter S increases by 2.When the counter
S is equal to 0, the downlink radio link is considered as failed.Therefore, when the voice
or data quality is degraded to an unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved
This
parameter
specifies
allow emergency
calls. For
whose access class
through
power control
or whether
channel to
handover,
the connection
is toMSs
be re-established
or
is
from 0 to 9, if this parameter is set to No, emergency calls are allowed.
released.
For MSs whose access class is from 11 to 15, emergency calls are not allowed only when
the
control
bit is set
to 0 and
Emergent
Callof
Disable
set to Yes.
Thisaccess
parameter
specifies
whether
to allow
the MSs
specialisaccess
classes to access
the network. This parameter is used for load control. Value 1 indicates that access is not
allowed. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed.
For example,
000001
indicates
that
classes
except access
class 10classes
are allowed
to
This
parameter
specifies
whether
to users
allow of
theallMSs
of common
to access
access
the network.
In the cell
theload
traffic
volume is heavy, congestion may occur
the network.
This parameter
is where
used for
control.
in
busy1 hours.
Forthat
example,
RACH
burstValue
occurs,
the AGCH
flow
is overloaded,
or
Value
indicates
accessmore
is not
allowed.
0 indicates
that
access
is allowed.For
the Abis interface
flow is
overloaded.If
this
parameter
is setexcept
to 1 forclass
the MSs
some to
example,
0000000001
indicates
that the
MSs
of all classes
0 areofallowed
classes,
thenetwork.
traffic volume in this cell may be reduced.
access the
During the BTS installation, activation, or cell maintenance test, this parameter can be
set to 1. All MSs are not allowed to access the network, thus reducing the impact on
installation or maintenance.
This
parameter
thevolume
maximum
number
of Channel
Request
messages
thatFor
can
In the
cell wherespecifies
the traffic
is heavy,
congestion
may
occur in
busy hours.
be
sent bymore
an MS
in anburst
immediate
example,
RACH
occurs,assignment
the AGCH isprocedure.
overloaded, or the Abis interface is
After
the MS initiates
the immediate
procedure,
it alwaysthe
listens
tovolume
the
overloaded.If
this parameter
is set toassignment
1 for the MSs
of some classes,
traffic
in
messages
on be
thereduced.
BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH
this cell may
group to which the MS belongs.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment
messages or Immediate Assignment Extend messages, the MS re-sends Channel
Request messages at a specified interval.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions of the immediate
assignment message. When this number is reached, the immediate assignment
message is not retransmitted even if the Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit (ms) is not
exceeded.
Within the period specified by this parameter, the immediate assignment message is
dispatched and retransmitted. Otherwise, the message is not dispatched or
retransmitted.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the immediate assignment
retransmission parameter to the BTS.
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS
and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This
parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a fullrate channel).
For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the
T200
SDCCH is
(5performed
ms) parameter.
Error control
on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS
parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a halfrate channel).
T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH.
parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SACCH.
parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I during the multiframe release.
parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions of the I frame.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter to the BTS.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 when the SDCCH supports SAPI3
services.
For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of
the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH on the
SDCCH.
For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of
the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um
interface when the TCH supports SAPI3 services. For details of the function of timer
T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms)
parameter. SAPI0 maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message
services.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um
interface when the TCH supports SAPI0 services. For details of the function of timer
T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms)
parameter. SAPI0 maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message
services.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHH over
the Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the
descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
This
over
This parameter
parameter specifies
specifies the
the expiry
expiry value
value of
of timer
timer T200
T200 used
used for
for the
the FACCH/TCHF
SDCCH over the
Um
the
Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the
interface.
descriptions
of
the
T200
SDCCH
(5
ms)
parameter.
T200 prevents the data link layer from deadlock during data transmission. The data link
layer transforms the physical link that is vulnerable to errors into a sequential non-error
data link. The entities at the two ends of this data link use the acknowledgement
retransmission mechanism.
Each message must be confirmed by the peer end.In unknown cases, both ends are
For
the BTS3X
in 03.0529
orAt
later
thethe
double-transceiver
BTSs, this
parameter
waiting
if a message
is lost.
thisand
time,
deadlock of the system
occurs.Therefore,
specifies
the end
levelmust
threshold
for the
random
access
of theexpires,
MS. If the
level
the transmit
establish
a timer.
When
the timer
thereceive
transmit
endof the
RACH
burst
smaller
than
the
value
RACH Min.Access
Level,
the BTS
regards
thatisthe
receive
end
does
notofreceive
the message
and then
the regards
transmitthis
end
access
as anthe
invalid
one and no
decoding
is performed. Ifisthe
receive level
of the RACH
retransmits
message.The
number
of retransmissions
determined
by N200.T200
burst
is greater
than the
of RACH
Min. Access
Level,transmits
the BTS considers
and the
N200 ensure
thatvalue
the data
link layer
sequentially
data and that an
the
access
request
exists
on this
timeslot, and determines together with the value of
transmission
is free
from
errors.
Random Access Error Threshold whether the RACH access is valid.
Generally, RACH Busy Threshold is higher than RACH Min.Access Level. Therefore, for
the
RACH
Min.Access
Level is shielded.
Fortraining
the BTS2X
(excluding the BTS24), the
ThisBTS24,
parameter
specifies
the correlation
between
sequences.
RACH Min.Access
Level
parameter
is invalid.
According
the GSM
protocols,
the system
determines whether the received signal is the
random access signal of an MS through the correlation between training sequences (41
bits) and calculates the TA value.
This parameter specifies the following rules for TRX aiding function control:
TRX Aiding Not Allowed: The TRX aiding function is disabled.
Allowed & Recover Forbidden: The TRX aiding is allowed but the switchback is forbidden
This
specifies
the speech version supported by the BSC. The value of this
afterparameter
the faulty TRX
is restored.
parameter
has six bits.
Allowed & Recover
Immediately: The TRX aiding is enabled but the switchback is
The
six bitsimmediately
(from the most
significant
to is
the
least significant bit) indicate the
performed
after
the faultybit
TRX
restored.
following
versions
respectively:
Allowed &speech
Recover
When Check
Res: The TRX aiding is enabled and the switchback is
half-rate
version performed
3, half-rateafter
version
half-rate
version
1, full-rate
3, full-rate
not immediately
the2,
faulty
TRX is
restored.
Instead,version
the switchback
is
version
2, and
full-rate
version 1.
Here,
2, and 1usually
indicate2 AMR,
EFR, and FR
performed
during
the resource
check
inversions
the early3,morning,
o'clock.
respectively.
If a bit is 1, you can infer that the BSC supports the corresponding speech version. If a
bit is 0, you can infer that the BSC does not support the corresponding speech version.
For example, if the parameter is set to 001011, you can infer that full-rate versions 1-2
and half-rate version 1 are supported.
In the
HDLC networking
if only
full-rate
version
1 among
the threeAMR
full-rate
This
parameter
specifies mode,
the value
of Radio
Link
Timeout
under half-rate
calls. For
versions
is selected,
it is
recommended
the AEC delay of all the DSPs in the DPUX
details, see
Radio Link
Timeout
(SACCH that
period(480ms)).
and DPUC be set to 141 so that the downlink traffic flow is further decreased.
This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. For
details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).
This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under half-rate AMR calls.
For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.
This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under full-rate AMR calls.
For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.
This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry.
When target cells are selected during direct retry, only the cells whose loads are smaller
than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate
target cells.
When Assignment Cell Load Judge Enabled is set to Yes, the directed try procedure is
For theifBTS3X
series and
this supports
parameter
specifies
level
started
the following
twodouble-transceiver
conditions are met:BTSs,
The cell
directed
try.the
The
load
threshold
the MS than
random
access
the BTS
the RACH busy state.
of the cell for
is greater
or equal
towhen
Cell Direct
Trydetermines
Forbidden Threshold.
When
the receive
level ofthe
thetotal
random
access
burst timeslot
is greater
thanand
this the
This parameter
specifies
number
of paging
times. The
parameter
threshold,
theconfigured
BTS considers
that
theside
timeslot
is busy.
For thethe
BTS3X
series
paging times
on the
MSC
together
determine
number
ofand the
double-transceiver
BTSs,
this parameter
onlytotal
indicates
whether
the
timeslot is busy.
The
retransmissions of the
paging
message. The
paging
times is
approximately
equal
threshold
setting does
not affect
thepaging
normal
access
of the MS.
to this parameter
multiplied
by the
times
configured
on the MSC side. At present,
For
BTS2X
series
(excluding
the
BTS24),
this parameter
specifies
level threshold
the the
Paging
Times
is set
to 4 in the
MSC.
The BSC
does not support
thethe
mechanism
for
for
the BTSthe
to determine
an MS random
access.When
receivemessage
level of the
random
resending
paging message;
therefore,
it processesthe
a paging
each
time it
access
timeslotmessage.
is greaterThe
than
this threshold
anddouble-transceiver
the access demodulation
is
receivesburst
the paging
BTS2X,
BTS3X, and
BTS support
successful,
the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy and determines whether the
paging retransmission.
RACH access is valid based on the parameter Random Access Error Threshold. For the
BTS2X,
the parameter
is used
whether the
timeslot
This parameter
is usedRACH
by theBusy
BTS Threshold
to inform the
BSC to
of determine
radio link connection
failure.
is
busy.
In BTS
addition,
the the
parameter
the normal
access
the
MS.
The
MS access
When
the
receives
SACCH affects
measurement
report
from of
the
MS,
the
counter
for
is
allowed only
when the
levellink
of the
MS random
burst
greater
than the
RACH
determining
whether
a radio
is faulty
is set toaccess
the value
ofisthis
parameter.
Each
time
Busy
Threshold.
the BTS
fails to decode the SACCH measurement report sent by the MS, the counter
For
the
BTS24,
this
parameter
has
two
functions.
One
function
is
indicating
the
level
decreases by 1. If the BTS successfully decodes the SACCH measurement report, the
threshold
of the MS
access for the system to determine the RACH busy state.
counter increases
byrandom
2.
When
of the random
burst
timeslot
is greater
this
When the
the receive
value oflevel
the counter
is 0, theaccess
radio link
fails.The
BTS
sends athan
connection
threshold,
the BTS
considers
the timeslot
is busy.
The other
function is
indicating
failure indication
message
to that
the BSC.The
number
of SACCH
multi-frames
and
the radio
whether
the
MS
access
is
allowed.The
MS
access
is
allowed
only
when
access
level
This
parameter
specifies
the
length
of
timer
T3150.
For
details,
see
GSM
Rec.
08.58
link failure counter in the system message specify the radio link failure time on
the and
(including
access
and handover
access)
isjudgment
greater than
the threshold.
04.08.
uplink
andrandom
that on
the
downlink
respectively.
The
standard
is retransmissions.
whether the
This
parameter
specifies
the
maximum
number
of
Physical
information
The
value
of this
parameter
ranges
from 0to
to 63 MS,
(corresponding
to -110
dBm T3105.If
to -47
When
the
BTS
sends
physical
information
the BTS
starts
the timer
SACCH
message
is
correctly
decoded.
Assume
that
the
maximum
number
is Ny1. Ifthe
the number
of retransmissions
exceeds
dBm).
the
timer
T3105
expires
before
BTS
receives
the
SAMB
frame
from
MS,
BTS
resends
Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS sends the
physical
information
to MS
and restarts
the
timer
The maximum
for After
BSC
a connection
failure
message,
which
can
alsoT3105.
be a handover
failure times
message.
resending
physical
information
Ny1.
receiving the
message,
the BSCisreleases
the newly assigned dedicated channel and
stops the timer T3105.
During asynchronous handover, the MS constantly sends handover access bursts to the
BTS. Usually, the Timer T3124 is set to 320 ms. Upon detecting the bursts, the BTS
sends a Physical information message to the MS over the main DCCH/FACCH and sends
the MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the BSC. Meanwhile, the timer T3105 starts.
The Physical information containing information about different physical layers
guarantees correct MS access. If the timer T3105 expires before the BTS receives the
SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS resends the Physical information message to the MS.
This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.
Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.
No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover
are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a TDD 3G better cell handover is
triggered.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover
are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a TDD 3G better cell handover is
triggered.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
If both the Inter-System Handover Enable and the Better 3G Cell HO Allowed
parameters are set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an
adjacent 3G cell is greater than the TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a
period of time. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110
dBm to -47 dBm).
If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold,
and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than
or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred.
Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred.
This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a
3G cell.
During a measurement period, a fast handover occurs only if the difference of path loss
between a chain neighbor cell and the serving cell is greater than or equal to the value
of this parameter.
The level values 0 to 127 map with -64 dB to 63 dB.
This parameter specifies the penalty that is performed on the downlink level of the
original serving cell after a successful fast handover.
This parameter specifies the duration of penalty that is performed on the original
serving cell after a successful fast handover.
This parameter specifies the allowed number of invalid measurement reports when the
BSC uses the measurement reports for filtering. If the number of received measurement
reports is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, no filtering is performed
and no fast handover decision is made.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the
BSC receives the measurement reports of the adjacent cell from the BTS. This helps to
avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the
BSC receives the measurement reports of the serving cell from the BTS. This helps to
avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report.
The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions
of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion, that is, the period during which the
triggering conditions of fast handover are met. Such a period is within the value defined
by this parameter.
The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions
of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. That is, if the triggering conditions
of fast handover is met for a period longer than or equal to the value of this parameter,
a fast handover is triggered.
During a measurement period, if the MS moves at a speed greater than the value of this
parameter, a fast handover is triggered.
During a measurement period, if the compensated downlink level of the serving cell is
smaller than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered.
During a measurement period, if the filtered uplink level of the serving cell is smaller
than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered.
During the UL subcell to the OL subcell handover in the enhanced dualband network, if
the traffic load in the OL subcell is higher than the Inner Cell Serious Overload
Threshold, a load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell cannot be triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband
handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding
handover decision is triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband
handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding
handover decision is triggered.
After a handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell is successful, no handover
can be triggered within the period defined by this parameter.
This parameter specifies the level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the
UL subcell.
This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the
OL subcell to the UL subcell.
In Enhanced dualband If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is lower than the UL
Subcell Lower Load Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the
same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may
occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load
handover algorithm, the calls in the cell are handed over to the UL subcell by level.
This parameter specifies the period of load handover for each level.
This parameter specifies whether the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL
subcell is enabled.
If the traffic load of the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell serious overload
threshold, the handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the
value of this parameter per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO
period.
This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the UL
subcell to the OL subcell.
This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the
UL subcell to the OL subcell.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the UL subcell general
overload threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and
the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target
cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm,
theprevent
calls in the
cell arehandovers,
handed over
toparameter
the OL subcell
by be
level.
To
ping-pong
this
should
decided before the handover
This the
parameter
specifies
load handover
for each
level.
from
OL subcell
to thethe
UL period
subcell.ofSuppose
the signal
strength
of serving cell is SS(s)
and the signal strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). The decision condition for a
This
parameter
is aOL
relative
value,
which
specifies
the
size of SS(s)
blank- zone
the UL
handover
from the
subcell
to the
UL subcell
is as
follows:
SS(n)between
< Distance
subcell
the OL subcell.
The OL
greater
the -value
of this
parameter
is, the Boudaries
larger the of
betweenand
Boundaries
of UL And
Subcells
Distance
Hysterisis
Between
blank
zone
is.
UL And
OL Subcells.
For the enhanced dualband handover algorithm, the boundaries of the OL and UL
subcells are determined according to the relative value between the signal strength of
serving cell and that of the adjacent cell. Suppose the signal strength of serving cell is
SS(s) and the signal strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). When SS(s) = SS(n), the
system considers that it is the boundary point of the UL subcell. When SS(s) - SS(n) >
Distance between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells, it is the coverage area of the OL
subcell.
If the flow control level in the current system is greater than the value of this parameter,
the handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell due to low or high UL subcell
load is not allowed.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter,
the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the
value of Step length of UL subcell load HO(dB) per second on the basis of UL subcell
load hierarchical HO period, thus speeding up the load handover.
some calls of the UL subcell is handed over to the OL subcell. Moreover, the MS that
sends the channel request message in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL
subcell.
This parameter specifies whether the channel request in the OL subcell is preferentially
processed over the channel request the UL subcell according to the UL Subcell Lower
Load Threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than the UL Subcell Lower
Load Threshold, the MS access to the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL
subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.
This parameter specifies whether the access request in the UL subcell is preferentially
processed over the access request in OL subcell according to the UL subcell general
overload threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell
general overload threshold, the MS access to the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to
the OL subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.
In an enhanced dualband cell, if TCH seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the
value of this parameter, some calls of the OL subcell is handed over to the UL subcell.
Moreover, the MS that sends the channel request message in the OL subcell is
preferentially assigned to the UL subcell.
This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.
Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.
No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are
met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better cell handover is triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are
met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better cell handover is triggered.
If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes, a
3G better cell handover is triggered when the Ec/No of an adjacent 3G cell is greater
than Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time.
The level values 0 to 49 map to -24 dB to 0 dB.
If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes, a
3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater
than RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time.The value of this
parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold,
and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than
or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred.
This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a
3G cell.
This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the UL subcell
to the OL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.
This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the OL subcell
to the UL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.
This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR HR voice service. It is
used in concentric cell handover decision. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to
70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10.
This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR FR voice service. It is
used in concentric cell handover decision.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality
level 0-7) x 10.
This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the OL
subcell to the UL subcell.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is higher than the En Iuo Out Cell General
OverLoad Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time
and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the
target cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover
algorithm, the calls in the cell are handed over to the target cell by level.
This parameter specifies the period of load handover for each level.
the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the
value of Modified step length of UL load HO period per second on the basis of UL subcell
load hierarchical HO period, thus speeding up the load handover from the UL subcell to
the OL subcell.
some calls in the UL subcell are handed over to the OL subcell.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter,
some calls in the OL subcell are handed over to the UL subcell.
When deciding whether a call can be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell,
the BSC determines whether the number of handover failures reaches the MaxRetry
Time after UtoO Fail. If the number reaches the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail, the UL
subcell to OL subcell handover is prohibited during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail.
Otherwise, the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is allowed.
After an OL subcell to UL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the
OL subcell to the UL subcell during the Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail.
After a UL subcell to OL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the
UL subcell to the OL subcell during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail.
If handover penalty is enabled, when a call is handed over from the OL subcell to the UL
subcell, it cannot be handed over back to the OL subcell during Penalty Time of UtoO HO
to avoid ping-pong handovers.
If this parameter is set to 0, handover penalty is not performed on the OL subcell to the
During
the handover.
handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell, the calls are hierarchically
UL subcell
handled from level 63 to 0. Therefore, the calls with higher receive level can be handed
over to the OL subcell first.
The handover strip is decreased by Underlay HO Step Level every Underlay HO Step
Period.
This parameter, together with Underlay HO Step Period, controls the level strip of the
When
multiple
for thetoUL-to-OL
handover
are sent
simultaneously,
calls
handover
from requests
the UL subcell
the OL subcell.
In other
words,
the time taken
in with
This
parameter
determines
whether
the
traffic
load
in the
ULto
determines
UL
lower
level may
be handed
over
first.from
This
does
not conform
the principle
that the
call
subtracting
Underlay
HO Step
Level
the
handover
strip
issubcell
Underlay
HO Step
Period.
subcell
to OL
subcell
handover
or the over
OL subcell
to UL subcell handover in an enhanced
of the best
quality
should
be handed
preferentially.
concentric
cell.hierarchy handover algorithm is adopted to hand over the calls with
Therefore, the
When
parameter
is set
Yes, to OL subcell. The value of this parameter is the
higherthis
RX level
from the
UL to
subcell
If thetaken
call isininsubtracting
the OL subcell
and ifHO
theStep
OL to
UL HO
Allowed
parameter
sethandover
to Yes,
time
Underlay
Level
from
the signal
level ofisthe
the
OL subcell to UL subcell handover is triggered when the traffic load in the UL subcell
strip.
is lower than En Iuo Out Cell Low Load Threshold.
If the call is in the UL subcell and the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is triggered,
and if the UL to OL HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes, a timer is started when the
traffic load in the UL subcell is greater than En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold,
thus
handing over
the of
MSs
the UL subcell
the OL subcell.
If the traffic
load
the UL
This parameter
is one
theinparameters
thattodetermine
the coverage
of the
OL in
subcell
subcell
is lowerof
than
En Iuo Outconcentric
Cell General
OverLoad Threshold, the related timer is
and UL subcell
an enhanced
cell.
stopped,
and theConcentric
MSs in theAllowed
UL subcell
are not handed
OL subcell.
If
the Enhanced
parameter
is set to over
Yes, to
thethe
coverage
of the OL
When this
to No, thebytraffic
in the UL Level
subcell
is not taken
into
subcell
andparameter
UL subcell is
is set
determined
UtoOload
HO Received
Threshold,
OtoU
HO
account
triggering
the UL
subcell Threshold,
to OL subcell
theTA
OLHysteresis.
subcell to UL
Receivedfor
Level
Threshold,
RX_QUAL
TA handover
Threshold,orand
subcell
handover
an enhanced
concentric
cell. to -47 dBm.
The parameter
level
valuesis0in
through
map
to -110
dBm
This
one
of the63
parameters
that
determine the coverage of the OL subcell
and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell.
If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell is determined by OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, UtoO HO
Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis.
The
level values
0 through
63 map
to -110 dBm
to incoming-BSC
-47 dBm.
In
a concentric
cell,
the channel
assignment
for an
handover can be
processed in one of the following modes:
Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned.
In
a concentric
cell,Aan
intra-BSC
incoming
cell is
handover
request
can be processed in
Underlaid
Subcell:
channel
in the
UL subcell
preferentially
assigned.
one
of the following
modes:
No Preference:
A channel
is assigned according to general channel assignment
System
Optimization: The measurement level on the BCCH of the target cell is added to
algorithms.
the intra-BSC inter-cell handover request messages. Then, the BSC compares the
measurement value with RX_LEV Threshold, and determines the preferred service layer.
During the comparison and determination, the BSC does not take the RX_LEV Hysteresis
into consideration.
Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned.
Underlaid Subcell: A channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned.
IfNo
TAPreference:
Pref. of Imme-Assign
is set
to Yes and
the access_delay
in the channel
A channel Allowed
is assigned
according
to general
channel assignment
request
message is lower than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref., a channel in the OL
algorithms.
subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. Otherwise, a
channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned.
This parameter specifies whether a channel is assigned based on the access_delay in

the channel request message during an immediate assignment.
If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to No, a channel in the UL subcell is
preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment.
IfIfthe
Assign
Layer
parameter
toand
System
Optimization,in
the
current
TA Pref.
of Optimum
Imme-Assign
Allowed
is setistoset
Yes
the access_delay
the
channel
receive
on the
SDCCH
canTA
beThreshold
estimatedof(by
interpolating
andafiltering)
request level
message
is lower
than
Imme-Assign
Pref.,
channelbased
in the on
OL
the
uplink
measurementassigned
value in during
the measurement
reports
sent on the
SDCCH. aThen,
subcell
is preferentially
the immediate
assignment.
Otherwise,
the
BSC in
determines
whether
a TCH in the assigned.
UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be
channel
the UL subcell
is preferentially
assigned based on the result of comparing the receive level on the SDCCH and AssignIf
the Assign Optimum
Layer
to System
Optimization,
the current
optimum-level
Threshold,
andparameter
the result is
ofset
comparing
the
TA and TA Threshold
of
receive
levelPref..
on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on
Assignment
the
value
the
measurement
onto
the
SDCCH. Then,
Onlyuplink
whenmeasurement
the receive level
on in
the
SDCCH
is greaterreports
than orsent
equal
Assign-optimumthe
determines
whether
TCH than
in theTA
ULThreshold
subcell orofinAssignment
the OL subcell
should
levelBSC
Threshold
and the
TA is alower
Pref.,
a TCHbein the
assigned
on the result
of comparing
the uplink
receive
level
OL subcellbased
is preferentially
assigned
to the MS.
Otherwise,
a TCH
inon
thethe
ULSDCCH
subcelland
is
Assign-optimum-level
the result
of comparing the TA and TA Threshold
preferentially assignedThreshold,
to ensure and
successful
assignment.
of Assignment Pref..
Only when the uplink receive level on the SDCCH is greater than or equal to AssignIn
a concentric Threshold
cell, the TCH
in theTA
following
modes:
optimum-level
andcan
thebe
TAassigned
is lower than
Threshold
of Assignment Pref., a
System
Optimization:
Based
on the measurement
reports
on the aSDCCH,
TCH in the
OL subcell is
preferentially
assigned to the
MS. sent
Otherwise,
TCH in the
the BSC
UL
determines
which service
layer should
be preferentially
selected.
subcell is preferentially
assigned
to ensure
successful assignment.
Underlaid
Subcell:
The TCH63
in the
are to
preferentially
The level values
0 through
mapUL
tosubcell
-110 dBm
-47 dBm. assigned to an MS.
Overlaid Subcell: The TCH in the OL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS.
No preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment
algorithms.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are
met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are
met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is triggered.
This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell
and UL subcell.
If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis, RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV
Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, and TA Threshold.
If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis, UtoO HO Received Level
Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, and TA Threshold.
#N/A
One of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL
subcell. RX_QUAL Threshold = RQ (ranging from level 0 to level 7) x 10.
If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL
Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed
parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by
RX_QUAL
Threshold,
HOparameters
Received Level
Threshold,the
OtoU
HO Received
This parameter
is oneUtoO
of the
that determine
coverage
of the Level
OL subcell
Threshold,
TA
Threshold,
and
TA
Hysteresis.
and UL subcell.
When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL
Threshold,
TA Threshold,
andparameters
TA Hysteresis.
the Enhanced
Concentric
This
parameter
is one of the
thatIfdetermine
the coverage
of Allowed
the OL subcell
parameter
is set to Yes, this parameter is invalid.
and
UL
subcell.
UO Signal Intensity Difference = UO Amplifier Power Difference + Combiner Insertion
When
the Enhanced
Concentric
Allowedofparameter
is set to No,
the coverage
of the OL
Loss Difference
+ Path
Loss Difference
Different Antennas
+ Pass
Loss Difference
of
subcell
and
UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL
Different
Frequencies.
Threshold,
TAreceive
Threshold,
TA UL
Hysteresis.
If the
Allowed
Measure the
leveland
of the
subcell and
OLEnhanced
subcell at Concentric
several different
places if
parameter
is set
to OL
Yes,
this parameter
is invalid.
the UL subcell
and
subcell
use different
antennas. The recommended number of
The
RX_LEV
Threshold
parameter
refers
to
the
threshold
of
the
downlink
receive
level.
places is five.
The
level
values
0
through
63
map
to
-110
dBm
to
-47
dBm.
The OL subcell and the UL subcell have different transmit power. Therefore, the receive
level of the MS in the UL subcell is different from that in the OL subcell. This parameter
specifies the power that should be compensated for the OL subcell. The value of this
parameter should be the sum of these items: UO Amplifier Power Difference, Combiner
Insertion Loss Difference, Path Loss Difference of Different Antennas, and Pass Loss
Difference of Different Frequencies.
Thisparameter
value is measured
the site.the
Multiple-point
measurements
shouldfor
be the
performed
This
specifiesat
whether
TA is used as
a decisive condition
when
different
antennas are used for the OL subcell and UL subcell. If the Enhanced
concentric
cell handover.
Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is invalid. In other words, the
power of the OL subcell is not compensated.
This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive quality is used as a decisive
condition for the concentric cell handover.
This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive level is used as a decisive
condition for the concentric cell handover.
This parameter specifies whether the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is
enabled.
This parameter specifies whether the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is
enabled.
This parameter specifies the load threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To trigger an
intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover, the load of the non-BCCH frequencies should be higher
than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO.
This parameter specifies the signal quality threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To
trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover from a TCH to a BCCH, the downlink receive
quality should be lower than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO.
This parameter specifies the K offset used in K ranking.
To reduce the ping-pong effect in an handover, you are advised to subtract K Bias from
the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink
receive
level based
on the
K principle.
This parameter
specifies
the
expected uplink receive level on a new channel after an MS
is handed over to a new cell. This parameter is used for the MS Power Prediction after
HO. This parameter should be consistent with the UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold in Huawei
II power control algorithm, thus ensuring a relatively high uplink receive level on the
new channel after handover, increasing the transmit power of the MS, and avoiding call
drops caused by too low a uplink receive level.
dBm).
This parameter specifies the period in which penalty is performed on the adjacent cells
of the cell where a fast-moving MS is located. The adjacent cells must be located at the
Macro, Micro, or Pico layer other than the Umbrella layer.
If an MS is moving fast, the BSC performs penalty on the adjacent cells of the cell where
the MS is located. This parameter specifies the penalty value. Only when the MS is
located at the Umbrella layer and the adjacent cells are located at the Macro, Micro, or
Pico layer, penalty is performed.
This parameter is valid within only the Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO.
The two intra-cell handovers that occur during the period specified by this parameter
are regarded as consecutive handovers.
When the number of consecutive intra-cell handovers reaches the maximum allowed, a
timer is started to forbid the intra-cell handover.
Intra-cell handovers are allowed only when the timer expires.
This parameter determines the maximum number of consecutive intra-cell handovers
allowed.
If the interval of two continuous intra-cell handovers is shorter than a specified
threshold, the two handovers are regarded as consecutive handovers. If multiple
consecutive intra-cell handovers occur, the intra-cell handover is forbidden for a period.
The time threshold is calculated based on the cell radius (r) and the velocity (v). The
threshold equals 2r/v. If the time taken by an MS to pass a cell is smaller than this
threshold, the MS is regarded as moving fast. Otherwise, the MS is regarded as moving
slow.
According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the
BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter
corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the
BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter
corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
In hierarchical load handover, the handover strip increases by one Load HO Step Level
for every Load HO Step Period, starting from the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold. The
handovers are performed as such until all the calls whose receive levels are within the
range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO
Bandwidth) are handed off the current serving cell.
When
the load
of the
is equal
to or greater
than
thethat
LoadofHO
all the calls
The value
of Load
HOcell
Step
Level must
be smaller
than
theThreshold,
Load HO Bandwidth.
served by the cell may send handover requests simultaneously, and the load on the CPU
will increase rapidly as a consequence. In some cases, call drops may occur due to
traffic congestion in the cell. Therefore, the hierarchical handover algorithm for load
handover is used for the BSC to control the number of users to be handed over by
levels.
Thissetting
parameter
specifies
the period
for each
level.
The
of this
parameter
is dependent
onload
the handover
Edge HO DL
RX_LEV Threshold
parameter.
Only when the receive level of the serving cell is within the range of (Edge HO DL
RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth), a load
handover is allowed.
If the cell load is smaller than the value of this parameter, the cell can receive the MSs
System
to the the
system
flux obtained
based
on message
handed flux
overthresholds
from othercorrespond
cells. Otherwise,
cell rejects
the MSs
handed
over from
packets,
CPU load, and FID queuing load. The system flux level is the current flux control
other cells.
level of the system.
0-11: There are 12 flow control levels. Where, 0 indicates the lowest level and 11
When Load
HO
Allowed
is set to Yes, Load HO Threshold should be set to 85.
indicates
the
highest
level.
The
traffic
load ofisaallowed
cell refers
towhen
the TCH
the cell.
A load
handover
only
the seizure
system rate
flux in
is lower
than the value of this
The load handover
is triggered
whenover
the traffic
load in athreshold
cell is greater
parameter.
The handover
performed
the maximum
may than
have the value of
this parameter.
In other
words,
the load
handover
is triggered
when
ratio
tremendous
impacts
on the
system.
Thus,
this parameter
should
notthe
be set
toofa TCHs
higher
occupied
in a cell reaches the threshold defined
for load
value.
1) The
flow handover.
control level algorithm for the
assigned system messages: [(Average Message Usage - Inner Flow Control Discard
Begin Threshold)/(Inner Flow Control Discard All Threshold - Inner Flow Control Discard
Begin Threshold) x 100]/10+1 (round-down for division operation). If the value is smaller
than Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold, Level 0 is used. If the value is equal to
or greater than Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold, the level is calculated. The
value range is from 0 to 11.
2)
Flow
control
threshold
for corresponds
the CPU to start
to discard quality
the channel
messages
The
value
of this
parameter
to multiplying
level access
0 to 7 by
10. An
and
paging handover
messages:can
80%
emergency
be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is
. Flow control
threshold
theparameter.
CPU to discard all channel access messages and paging
greater
than the
value offor
this
messages: 100%
. CPU usage smaller than 80% corresponds to level 0. CPU usage equal to or greater
than CPU flow control threshold 80% corresponds to level 2. An increase of 5% means
The
value ofof
this
parameter
to multiplying
0 to
an increase
2 levels.
Levelcorresponds
10 is the highest.
The levelquality
value level
can be
0, 7
2,by
4, 10.
6, 8,An
and
emergency
handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS
10.
is greater than the value of this parameter.


emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS
is greater than the value of this parameter.
This parameter specifies the quality level offset of the interface handover of the AMR FR
service relative to non-AMR services or the AMR HR service (x 10). When determining
whether an interference handover should be triggered, the system compares the
receive quality of the MS minus the RXLEVOff with the handover threshold.
For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference
handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter
is set to a small value.
When n = 1, that is, when the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal
If
level of the
serving cell is greater than or equal to 63, and if the uplink or
tothe
30,receive
this parameter
is invalid.
downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 59 to 62, and if the uplink or
If the receive level of the serving cell is 31, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality
of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter,
uplink interference or downlink interference exists.
If the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal to 30, and if the uplink or
If the number of consecutive measurement reports without the downlink measurement

report is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, the handover decision
related to no downlink measurement report is allowed.
If the downlink MRs are not included in the MRs received, and if the uplink receive
quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, a no downlink
measurement report emergency handover is triggered.
When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover is preferentially
selected.
An intra-cell
is triggered
if no candidate
is available
This parameter
is usedhandover,
to controlhowever,
the no downlink
measurement
reportcell
handover
and
if intra-cell handovers are allowed.
algorithm.
If this parameter is set to 0, the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm is

disabled. Therefore, handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is
not allowed in this cell.
If this
parameter
set for
to 1,
the no downlink
measurement
report
handover
algorithm
This
parameter
is is
used
configuring
the filter
for the rapidly
dropped
receive
level. is
enabled.
Therefore,
handover
decision
related
nothe
downlink
measurement
report
is
Together
with filter
parameter
B, it is one
of
thetofor
nine
filter
parameters.
This
parameter
is used
for configuring
the
filter
rapidly
dropped The
receive
level.
allowed
in this formula
cell.
corresponding
as follows
(indrop
the trend
program,
thereceive
value of
A1 within
to A8 can
be
This parameter
indicateisspecifies
the
of the
level
a period.
obtained
by subtracting
the
configured
and Bdrop
is the
value of the
If this parameter
is set to10
a from
higher
value,
a morevalue,
rapid level
is negative
required for
configured
triggering avalue):
rapid level drop handover. This parameter is used together with the Filter
C1(nt)
= A1 A1
x C(nt)
+ A2
C(nt-t) + A3the
x C(nt-2t)
A8 x C(nt-7t).
C(nt)
is the
Parameters
to
This
parameter
is A8.
used
forx configuring
filter for++
the rapidly
droppedWhere,
receive
level.
uplink
RX_Level
of
the
serving
cell
in
the
MR
received
at
the
time
of
nt.
If
C1(nt)
is
For
details,
refer
to
Filter
Parameters
A1-A8.
Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The
smaller
than B,formula
and if C(nt)
below (in
thethe
Edge
HO RX_LEV
Thrsh.,
corresponding
is asisfollows
program,
the value
of then
A1 tothe
A8 signal
can belevel is
considered
be rapid dropping.
obtained byto
subtracting
10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the
Filter
parameters
configured
value):A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters A1 to A8
correspond
to
a1 to +
a8A2
in xthe
program,
and
ai = Ai-10
(i A8
= 1-8).
Therefore,
among
a1
C1(nt)
=
A1
x C(nt)
C(nt-t)
+ A3the
x C(nt-2t)
++
x C(nt-7t).
Where,
C(nt)
is to
the
Thisinparameter
is used
for
configuring
filter for
theor
rapidly
dropped
receive
level.
a8
the
program,
there
must
be values
smaller
than
equal
to 0.
uplink
RX_Level
of
the
serving
cell
in
the
MR
received
at
the
time
of
nt.
If
C1(nt)
is
Together
with
filter
parameter
B,
it
is
one
of
the
nine
filter
parameters.
The
For
example,
if the
level
drops
in aRX_LEV
granularity
period,
you
need tolevel
set A3
smaller
than B,
andreceive
if C(nt)
below
therapidly
Edge
HO
Thrsh.,
then
the
corresponding
formula
is A2
asisto
follows
the
program,
value
A1+toa2
A8xsignal
can
be = is
to
A8 to 10,to
A1be
torapid
0, and
20. In(in
this
case,
C1(nt)the
= a1
x Cof
(nt)
C(nt-t)
considered
dropping.
obtained by subtracting
10 from
the level
configured
value, andyou
B is the negative
value a
of the
10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).
To to
trigger
a rapid
drop
set C1(nt)
Filter
parameters
A1
A8 may
be smaller
thanhandover,
or equal to 10.should
Parameters
A1 totoA8
configured
value):
value
smaller
than
B.
and
then
the
fast
level
drop
appears
in
a
MR
period.
The
formula
correspond
a1 to +
a8A2
in xthe
program,
and
ai = Ai-10
(i A8
= 1-8).
Therefore,
among
a1
C1(nt)
=the
A1 to
x C(nt)
C(nt-t)
+ A3in
x an
C(nt-2t)
++
x C(nt-7t).
Where,
C(nt)
is to
the
reflects
rapid
of
the
cell
MR.for
This
is drop
used
for
configuring
the
filter
theor
rapidly
dropped
receive
level.
a8
inparameter
the
program,
there
must
belevel
values
smaller
than
equal
to 0.
uplink
RX_Level
of
the
serving
cell
in
the
MR
received
at
the
time
of
nt.
If
C1(nt)
is
You
can
configure
the
filter
to
define
the
number
of
MRs
used
and
the
extent
to
which
Together
withiffilter
parameter
B,drops
it is one
of the
filter parameters.
Theneed to set A3
For
example,
the
receive
level
rapidly
in nine
aRX_LEV
granularity
period,
you
smaller
than
B,formula
and
if C(nt)
isfollows
below
the
Edge
HO
Thrsh.,
then
the
is
the
level
drops.
However,
the
ofthe
this
parameter
complicated.
corresponding
is A2
as
program,
value
A1+toa2
A8xsignal
can
belevel
to A8
to 10,
A1be
to
0, and
tosetting
20. In(in
this
case,
C1(nt)the
=isa1
x Cof
(nt)
C(nt-t)
=
considered
to
rapid
dropping.
obtained
by
subtracting
10
from
the
configured
value,
and
B
is
the
negative
value
of
the
10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).
To to
trigger
a rapid
level drop
you
set C1(nt)
a
Filter
parameters
A1
A8 may
be smaller
thanhandover,
or equal to
10.should
Parameters
A1 totoA8
configured
value):
value
smaller
than
B.a8and
then
the fast and
levelaidrop
appears
in a MR
period. The
formula
correspond
to
a1
to
in
the
program,
=
Ai-10
(i
=
1-8).
Therefore,
among
a1
C1(nt)
=the
A1 rapid
x C(nt)
+ A2
x
C(nt-t)
+ A3in
x an
C(nt-2t)
++
A8 x C(nt-7t).
Where,
C(nt)
is to
the
reflects
of
the
cell
MR.for
This
is drop
used
for
configuring
the
filter
theor
rapidly
dropped
receive
level.
a8
inparameter
the
program,
there
must
belevel
values
smaller
than
equal
to 0.
uplink
RX_Level
of
the
serving
cell
in
the
MR
received
at
the
time
of
nt.
If
C1(nt)
is
You
can
configure
the
filter
to
define
the
number
of
MRs
used
and
the
extent
to
which
Together
with
filter
parameter
B,
it
is
one
of
the
nine
filter
parameters.
The
For
example,
if the
receive
level
drops
rapidly
in aRX_LEV
granularity
period,
you
need tolevel
set A3
smaller
than
B,
and
if C(nt)
isfollows
below
the
Edge
HO
Thrsh.,
then
the
the
level
drops.
However,
the
ofthe
this
parameter
complicated.
corresponding
formula
is A2
as
program,
value
A1+toa2
A8xsignal
can
be = is
to
A8
to 10,
A1be
to
0, and
tosetting
20. In(in
this
case,
C1(nt)the
=isa1
x Cof
(nt)
C(nt-t)
considered
to
rapid
dropping.
obtained
by subtracting
10 from
the level
configured
value, andyou
B is the negative
value a
of the
10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).
To to
trigger
a rapid
drop
set C1(nt)
Filter
parameters
A1
A8 may
be smaller
thanhandover,
Parameters
A1 totoA8
configured
value):
value
smaller
than
B.
and
then
the
fast
level
drop
appears
in
a
MR
period.
The
formula
correspond
a1 to +
a8A2
in xthe
program,
and
ai = Ai-10
(i A8
= 1-8).
Therefore,
among
a1
C1(nt)
=the
A1 to
x C(nt)
C(nt-t)
+ A3in
x an
C(nt-2t)
++
x C(nt-7t).
Where,
C(nt)
is to
the
reflects
rapid
of
the
cell
MR.for
This
is drop
used
for
configuring
the
filter
theor
rapidly
dropped
receive
level.
a8
inparameter
the
program,
there
must
belevel
values
smaller
than
equal
to 0.
uplink
RX_Level
of
the
serving
cell
in
the
MR
received
at
the
time
of
nt.
If
C1(nt)
is
You
can
configure
the
filter
to
define
the
number
of
MRs
used
and
the
extent
to
which
Together
withiffilter
parameter
B,drops
it is one
of the
filter parameters.
Theneed to set A3
For
example,
the
receive
level
rapidly
in nine
aRX_LEV
granularity
period,
you
smaller
than
B,formula
and
if C(nt)
isfollows
below
the
Edge
HO
Thrsh.,
then
the
is
theA8
level
drops.
However,
the
ofthe
this
parameter
complicated.
corresponding
is A2
as
program,
value
A1+toa2
A8xsignal
can
belevel
to
to 10,
A1be
to
0, and
tosetting
20. In(in
this
case,
C1(nt)the
=isa1
x Cof
(nt)
C(nt-t)
=
considered
to
rapid
dropping.
obtained
by
subtracting
10
from
the
configured
value,
and
B
is
the
negative
value
of
the
10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).
To to
trigger
a rapid
level drop
you
set C1(nt)
a
Filter
parameters
A1
A8 may
be smaller
thanhandover,
or equal to
10.should
Parameters
A1 totoA8
configured
value):
value
smaller
than
B.a8and
then
the fast and
levelaidrop
appears
in a MR
period. The
formula
correspond
to
a1
to
in
the
program,
=
Ai-10
(i
=
1-8).
Therefore,
among
a1
C1(nt)
=the
A1 rapid
x C(nt)
+ A2
x
C(nt-t)
+ A3in
x an
C(nt-2t)
++
A8 x C(nt-7t).
Where,
C(nt)
is to
the
reflects
of
the
cell
MR.for
Thisinparameter
is drop
used
for
configuring
the
filter
theor
rapidly
dropped
receive
level.
a8
the
program,
there
must
belevel
values
smaller
than
equal
to 0.
uplink
RX_Level
of
the
serving
cell
in
the
MR
received
at
the
time
of
nt.
If
C1(nt)
is
You
can
configure
the
filter
to
define
the
number
of
MRs
used
and
the
extent
to
which
Together
with
filter
parameter
B,
it
is
one
of
the
nine
filter
parameters.
The
For example,
if the
receive
level
drops
rapidly
in aRX_LEV
granularity
period,
you
need tolevel
set A3
smaller
than
B,
and
if C(nt)
isfollows
below
the
Edge
HO
Thrsh.,
then
the
the
level
drops.
However,
the
ofthe
this
parameter
complicated.
corresponding
formula
is A2
as
program,
value
A1+toa2
A8xsignal
can
be = is
to
A8
to 10,
A1be
to
0, and
tosetting
20. In(in
this
case,
C1(nt)the
=isa1
x Cof
(nt)
C(nt-t)
considered
to
rapid
dropping.
obtained
by subtracting
10 from
the level
configured
value, andyou
B is the negative
value a
of the
10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).
To to
trigger
a rapid
drop
set C1(nt)
Filter
parameters
A1
A8 may
be smaller
thanhandover,
Parameters
A1 totoA8
configured
value):
value smaller
than
B.a8and
then
the fast and
levelaidrop
appears
in a MR
period. The
formula
correspond
to
a1
to
in
the
program,
=
Ai-10
(i
=
1-8).
Therefore,
among
a1
C1(nt)
=the
A1 rapid
x C(nt)
+ A2
x
C(nt-t)
+ A3in
x an
C(nt-2t)
++
A8 x C(nt-7t).
Where,
C(nt)
is to
the
reflects
of
the
cell
level
MR.for
This
parameter
is drop
used
for
configuring
the
filter
theor
rapidly
dropped
receive
level.
a8
in
the
program,
there
must
be
values
smaller
than
equal
to
0.
uplink
RX_Level
of the
the
serving
cell
in
the
MR
received
at the
time
ofthe
nt.extent
If C1(nt)
is
You
can
configure
filter
to
define
the
number
of
MRs
used
and
to
which
Together
with
filter
parameter
B,
it
is
one
of
the
nine
filter
parameters.
The
For
example,
if the
receive
level
drops
rapidly
in aRX_LEV
granularity
period,
you
need tolevel
set A3
smaller
than
B,
and
if C(nt)
isfollows
below
the
Edge
HO
Thrsh.,
then
the
theA8
level
drops.
However,
the
ofthe
this
parameter
complicated.
corresponding
formula
is A2
as
program,
value
A1+toa2
A8xsignal
can
be = is
to
to 10,
A1be
to
0, and
tosetting
20. In(in
this
case,
C1(nt)the
=isa1
x Cof
(nt)
C(nt-t)
considered
to
rapid
dropping.
obtained
by subtracting
10 from
the level
configured
value, andyou
B is the negative
value a
of the
10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).
To to
trigger
a rapid
drop
set C1(nt)
Filter parameters
A1
A8 may
be smaller
thanhandover,
Parameters
A1 totoA8
configured
value):
value
smaller
than
B.
and
then
the
fast
level
drop
appears
in
a
MR
period.
The
formula
correspond
a1 to +
a8A2
in xthe
program,
and
ai = Ai-10
= 1-8).
Therefore,
among
C1(nt)
=the
A1 to
x C(nt)
C(nt-t)
+ A3in
x an
C(nt-2t)
++(i A8
x C(nt-7t).
Where,
C(nt)a1
is to
the
reflects
rapid
drop
of must
the
cell
MR. than
a8
in the
program,
there
belevel
values
smaller
or the
equal
to 0.
uplink
RX_Level
of
the
serving
cell
in
the
MR
received
at
time
of
nt.
If
C1(nt)
is
You
can
configure
the
filter
to
define
the
number
of
MRs
used
and
the
extent
to
which
For example,
if the
receive
level
drops
rapidly
in aRX_LEV
granularity
period,
set A3
smaller
than
B,
and
if C(nt)the
is below
the
Edgeparameter
HO
Thrsh.,
then you
the need
signaltolevel
is
the
level
drops.
However,
of this
complicated.
to
A8
to 10,
A1be
to
0, and
A2 tosetting
20. In this
case, C1(nt) =isa1
x C (nt) + a2 x C(nt-t) =
considered
to
rapid
dropping.
10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).
To to
trigger
a rapid
level drop
you
set C1(nt)
a
Filter parameters A1
A8 may
be smaller
thanhandover,
or equal to
10.should
Parameters
A1 totoA8
value smaller
then
the fast and
levelaidrop
appears
in a MR
period. The
formula
correspond
to than
a1 toB.a8and
in the
program,
= Ai-10
(i = 1-8).
Therefore,
among
a1 to
reflects
rapid drop
of must
the cell
in smaller
an MR. than or equal to 0.
a8 in thethe
program,
there
belevel
values
You
can
configure
the
filter
touplink
define
the
number
MRs
used
and
theyou
extent
to to
which
This
parameter
specifies
the
quality
threshold
of an
emergency
handover.
An
For example,
if the
receive
level
drops
rapidly
in aofgranularity
period,
need
set A3
theA8
level
drops.
However,
the
setting
of this
parameter
complicated.
emergency
handover
dueA2
toto
bad
iscase,
triggered
the
quality
to
to 10,
A1 to
0, and
20.quality
In this
C1(nt)when
=isa1
x Cuplink
(nt) + receive
a2 x C(nt-t)
= is
greater
than or equal
to the UL
Qual.level
Threshold.
10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).
To trigger
a rapid
drop handover, you should set C1(nt) to a
When
an emergency
is triggered,
inter-cell
handover
value smaller
than B. handover
and then the
fast levelan
drop
appears
in a MR should
period. be
The formula
preferentially
selected.
Anthe
intra-cell
handover,
however, is triggered if no candidate cell
reflects the rapid
drop of
cell level
in an MR.
is
available
and if intra-cell
arenumber
allowed.
You
can configure
the filter handovers
to define the
of MRs used and the extent to which
the level drops. However, the setting of this parameter is complicated.
This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency

handover. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is
greater than or equal to the DL Qual. Threshold.
When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be
preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell
is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed.
An emergency handover is triggered when TA is greater than or equal to the value of
this parameter.
This parameter is used as a switch to control the value determination method of

measurement reports. When this parameter is set to Open, if DTX is used, the SUB
values in the MR should be selected. Otherwise, the PULL values in the MR should be
selected.
This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after
handover failure due to data configuration.
handover failure due to the Um interface error.
handover failure due to cell congestion.
When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the TCH
NBR_RCVD_BLOCK.
By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus
avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate.
When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the SDCCH
NBR_RCVD_BLOCK.
By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus
avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter specifies the penalty time for AMR full rate to half rate (FR-to-HR)
handovers. Before the timer expires, no AMR FR-to-HR handover is allowed if the
previous FR-to-HR handover fails due to channel unavailability or channel mismatch.
The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHFH HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult.
When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the
TCH REP_QUANT.
By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding
the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.
When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the
SDCCH REP_QUANT.
By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding
the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for
averaging the CV_BEP on the TCH.
By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the
case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.
averaging the CV_BEP on the SDCCH.
By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the
case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is
shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS.
averaging the MEAN_BEP on the TCH.
By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding
the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.
averaging the MEAN_BEP on the SDCCH.
By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding
the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original serving cell
after an emergency handover due to timing advance is performed.
After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original
serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority
and
the original
serving cell
is not
allowed.
This handover
parametertospecifies
the penalty
on the
signal
strength of the original serving cell to
avoid ping-pong handovers after an emergency handover due to the timing advance.
This parameter is valid only within the Penalty Time after TA HO.
After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original
and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed.
The parameter
penalty level
values the
0 through
63ofmap
-110 dBm
to -47
This
specifies
duration
the to
penalty
imposed
ondBm.
the original cell where
an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated.

During the penalty time, the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the
penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original
This
parameter
specifies
the degree of penalty imposed on the original serving cell
serving
cell is not
allowed.
where an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. This
parameter is defined to avoid ping-pong handover and is valid only within the Penalty
Time after BQ HO.
After an emergency handover is performed due to bad quality, the receive level of the
and handover to the serving cell is not allowed.
The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on the target cell.
This parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell penalty time.
The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
timing advance.
The TA value in a single MR may be inaccurate. You can set this parameter to average
the TA value in multiple MRs. The average TA value serves as the basis for handover
decision.
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in
neighbor cells. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by
Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions.
channel quality on the SDCCH.
signal strength on the SDCCH.
This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and
to ensure correct handover decisions.
This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost during
interpolation.
If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is equal to or smaller than the value of
this parameter, the linear interpolation processing of the lost MRs is performed
according to two consecutive MRs that are lost.
If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of this
parameter, all lost MRs are discarded, and calculations are made again when new MRs
are
Thisreceived.
parameter is used to select the candidate cells during directed retry. If the receive
level of an adjacent cell is greater than the value of this parameter, the adjacent cell
can be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry. The level values 0 through 63 map
to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
This parameter specifies the frequency at which the BTS sends the preprocessed MR to
the BSC. After preprocessing the MRs, the BTS sends the preprocessed MRs to the BSC.
For example, if this parameter is set to Twice every second, the BTS sends preprocessed
MRs to the BSC every 0.5 second.
This parameter specifies whether the BS/MS power class should be transferred from the
BTS to the BSC.
This parameter specifies whether the BTS should send the original measurement report
to the BSC. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS should send the preprocessed MR
and the original MR to the BSC.
This parameter specifies whether the BTS should preprocess MRs. This parameter
determines whether transmit power is controlled by the BTS or by the BSC. This
parameter is set to YES if power control is performed by the BTS. This parameter is set
to NO if power control is performed by the BSC.
This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead
of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. The
purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality.
This parameter specifies whether to penalize the target cell where a handover fails or
the serving cell where the TA is too great or the signal quality is too bad.
If the target cell is congested and an incoming cell handover fails, a penalty is
performed on the target cell to avoid the handover of the MS to the cell.
When the TA is great or the signal quality is bad, ping-pong handovers are likely to
occur. If a handover fails, a penalty should be performed on the serving cell. These kinds
of penalties can be performed on cells in one BSC or on external cells.
This parameter specifies whether to allow the inter-BSC SDCCH handover.
After the handover prohibition time for the initial access of an MS, the MS can be
handed over to another SDCCH in another BSC before a TCH is assigned.
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive emergency
handovers. No emergency handover is allowed during the minimum interval.
When the conditions for an emergency handover are met, an emergency handover
timer is started. Another emergency handover decision can be made only when the
timer expires.
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive handovers. No
handover is allowed during the minimum interval.
A timer starts after a handover is complete, and a subsequent handover is allowed only
after the timer expires. The value of this parameter is the length of the timer. The
parameter is used to avoid frequent handovers.
After a new SDCCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel
only if the time during which the MS occupies the SDCCH is longer than the period
specified by this parameter.
After a new TCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel
only if the time during which the MS occupies the TCH is longer than the period specified
by this parameter.
This parameter specifies the switch of the ATCB handover algorithm. The ATCB
handover algorithm can determine the coverage areas of the OL subcell and the UL
subcell and balance the load between the OL subcell and the UL subcell and between
the UL subcell and the adjacent subcell according to the actual networking. It can
decrease the interference, improve the conversation quality, and achieve the aggressive
frequency reuse of the OL subcell.
0: Close
1: Open
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover.
This parameter specifies whether the quick handover is enabled.

0: NO; 1: YES
This parameter specifies the threshold of the half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover.
When an AMR call occupies a half-rate TCH, an intra-cell half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH
handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains lower than the
configured H2F HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the
Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time.
This parameter specifies the threshold of the full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover.
When an AMR call occupies a full-rate TCH, an intra-cell full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH
handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains higher than the
configured F2H HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the
Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time.
The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is,
the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N
consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. The triggering conditions of the
intra-cell
full-rate
to half-rate
handover
are the
F2H HO
the H2F HO
This parameter
determines
the
period during
which
the Threshold
triggering or
conditions
of the
Threshold.
This parameter
is used
with the
intra-cell
full-rate
to half-rate
handover
are two
met.parameters.
The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is,
the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N
consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. The triggering conditions of the
intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are the F2H HO Threshold or the H2F HO
Threshold. This parameter is used with the two parameters.
This parameter specifies whether the AMR handover is enabled. This parameter does
not affect the dynamic non-AMR full-rate to half-rate handover.
The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of downlink receive level of an
adjacent cell.
Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum downlink power of the
candidate cell for handover + Minimum access level offset)
TheM
Mcriterion
criterionsupports
is met if the
uplink
of the adjacent
>= (Minimum
The
the Filtered
minimum
valuelevel
constraint
of uplink cell
receive
level of the
uplink
power
of
the
candidate
cell
for
handover
+
Minimum
access
level
offset);
adjacent cell.
otherwise,
the Mlevel
criterion
is adjacent
not met. cell >= (Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min
Expected uplink
of the
Access Level Offset)
The M criterion is met if the Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min DL
Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min Access Level Offset); otherwise, the M criterion is not
met.
This
specifies
the ranges
hysteresis
of0an
or inter-priority
This
The parameter
value of this
parameter
from
tointer-layer
63 (corresponding
to -110handover.
dBm to -47
parameter
is used to avoid inter-layer ping-pong handovers.
dBm).
Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of a serving cell = configured Inter-layer HO Threshold Inter-layer HO Hysteresis
Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of an adjacent cell = configured Inter-layer HO
Threshold + Inter-layer HO Hysteresis of an adjacent cell - 64.
This parameter is one bit of the 16 bits that are used by the BSC to sort the candidate
cells for handovers.
This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are
allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent
3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes.
According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering
conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT
handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell.
conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT
handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell.
According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in
the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical
handover is triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in
the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical
handover is triggered.
conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge
handover to the adjacent cell is triggered.
conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge
handover to the adjacent cell is triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its
corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an
edge handover is triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its
corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an
edge
triggered.
If the handover
DL receiveislevel
remains lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for a
This
parameter
P of the P/N
criterion.
period,
the edgecorresponds
handover isto
triggered.
If the
PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant
edge handover threshold can be decreased. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and
the edge handover threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel
interference, and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO DL
RX_LEV Threshold should be adjusted based on the handover performance statistics and
If
the
UL receive
level
remains lower
than the
HObalance.
UL RX_LEV Threshold for a
the
actual
network
performance
to achieve
theEdge
UL/DL
period, the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant
edge
handover
can
be decreased.
the
PBGT handover
not dBm
enabled
and
The value
of thisthreshold
parameter
ranges
from 0 toIf63
(corresponding
tois
-110
to -47
the
edge handover threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel
dBm).
interference, and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO UL
RX_LEV Threshold should be adjusted based on the handover performance statistics and
the actual network performance to achieve the UL/DL balance.
This parameter specifies whether the interference handover is enabled.
dBm).
When the receive level is higher the receive level threshold but the transmission quality
is lower than the interference handover quality threshold, the interference handover is
triggered. In other words, the MS is interfered and needs to be handed over.
This parameter specifies whether the concentric cell handover is enabled. The
concentric cell is used to achieve the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the
aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell. The concentric cell handover can improve
system capacity and conversation quality. The concentric cell handover can be classified
into the UL subcell to OL subcell handover and the OL subcell to UL subcell handover.
This parameter specifies whether the time advance (TA) handover is enabled. The TA
handover determines whether the timing advance (TA) is higher than the predefined TA
threshold. When the TA is higher than the predefined TA threshold, a TA handover is
triggered. The TA is calculated based on the distance between the MS and the BTS. The
longer the distance is, the greater the TA value is.
This parameter specifies whether the bad quality (BQ) handover is enabled. Whether a
BQ handover should be enabled depends on the UL and DL transmission quality (BER).
When the UL signal quality or the DL signal quality exceeds the BQ handover threshold.
a BQ emergency handover is performed. A rise in BER may result from too low a signal
level or channel interference.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the edge handover algorithm. When an MS
makes a call at the edge of a cell, the call may drop if the receive level is too low. To
avoid such a call drop, an edge handover can be performed. When the UL receive level
of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold or the DL receive
level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, the MS is
handed over to a neighbor cell.
This parameter specifies whether the layered hierarchical handover is enabled. Cells are
set to different layers and different priorities to implement the layered hierarchical
handover. Then, based on the layers and priorities, calls are handed over to the cells
with high priority (priority is related to Layer of the Cell and Cell Priority).
This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover
algorithm. Based on the path loss, the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search
for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. The
cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements. To avoid ping-pong
handovers, the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the
same layer and hierarchy. The PBGT handover cannot be performed on SDCCHs.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the rapid level drop handover. When this
function is enabled, an MS can be handed over to a new cell before the occurrence call
drop caused by the rapid drop of the receive level of the MS.
This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed
over to a macro cell. If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS that moves fast in a micro
cell can be handed over to a macro cell, thus reducing the number of handovers. It is
recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to
This
parameter
a traffic
load-sharingcell
handover
is enabled.
reduce
the CPU specifies
load. Thewhether
fast-moving
micro-to-macro
handover
algorithm is used
The
handover
helps to reduce cell congestion, improve success rate of channel
only load
in special
conditions.
assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells, thus improving the network
performance. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the
TCHs in the cells of the same layer.
The load handover is used as an emergency measure instead of a primary measure to
adjust abnormal traffic burst in partial areas. If load handovers occur frequently in a
partial area, the cell and TRX configuration of BTSs and the network layout should be
adjusted.
This parameter specifies whether the intra-cell handover is enabled. Note: A forced
intra-cell handover is not subject to this parameter.
This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled.
This parameter specifies whether to adjust the sequence of candidate cells. After the
sequence is adjusted, the handover within the same BSC/MSC takes priority.
The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of
cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details, see GSM
Rec. 05.08 and 04.08.
This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs.
This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. This parameter is valid only
before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. For details, see GSM Rec. 0508 and
0408.
This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs.
This parameter Additional Reselect Param Indication (ACS) is used to inform an MS

where cell reselection parameters can be obtained.
If this parameter is set to 0, the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for
calculating C2 from other bytes of the system information type 4 message. If this
parameter
is setspecifies
to 1, thethe
MSmanual
should obtain
PI and
other parameters for calculating C2
This parameter
correction
of C2.
from
other
bytes
of
the
system
information
type
7
orof
8 message.
If this parameter is properly configured, the number
handovers can be reduced and a
better cell can be assigned to the MS. When PT is set to 31, it becomes more difficult for
an MS to access the cell when CRO increases.
This
parameter
Cell should
Bar Qualify
(CBQ)
valid
for cell
selection.large
It is invalid
for bring
cell
Generally,
the CRO
be less
thanis25
dB only
because
excessively
CRO may
reselection.
uncertainties to the network.In addition, the same CRO applies to the cells with the
1:
barred
same
priority.For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08 and 04.08.
0:
allowed
This
parameter affects only GSM Phase II MSs or GSM PhaseII+ MSs.
Together with CBA, this parameter determines the priority of cells. For details, see GSM
Rec. 04.08.
Cell
Reselect0 Parameters
Indication (PI for short),
0
Normal
Normalsent on the broadcast channel,
indicates
whether
CRO, Barred
TO, and PT are used.
0
1
Barred
Actually,
the0MS is informed
cell reselection is performed. For details,
1
Low whether C2-based
Normal
see
0508.In addition, Normal
a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based
1 GSM Rec.
1 0408 andLow
cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection.
When PI is set to 1, the MS obtains the value of C2 based on the broadcast system
information and determines whether a cell is reselected. When PI is set to 0, that is, C2
equals
C1, the MS
determines
whether
a cell is
reselected
based
on the value
of C1.
This parameter
is used
to determine
whether
cell
reselection
is performed
between
different LACs. This parameter can prevent frequent location update, thus lowering the
possibility of losing paging messages. For details, see the description of the cell
This
parameter
specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update.
reselection
hysteresis.
In the VLR, a regular location update timer is defined. When the location update period
This
parameter
specifies
the numberisofimproved.
multi-frames
in the
a cycle
on thetraffic
paging
decreases,
the service
performance
When
signaling
of channel,
the
that
is, the
number the
of paging
on a drops.In
specific paging
channel.
network
increases,
usage sub-channels
of radio resources
addition,
when the location
In
actualperiod
situation,
an MS monitors
only the
associatedincreases,
paging sub-channel.
For details,
update
decreases,
the MS power
consumption
and the average
see
GSMtime
Rec. is
05.02
andshortened.When
05.08.
standby
greatly
setting this parameter, take into consideration
If the
value of this
parameter
increases,
number
of on
paging
in a cell
the
processing
capability
of the
MSC and the
BSC,
the load
the Asub-channels
interface, Abis
increases,
thusinterface,
reducingHLR,
the number
ofGenerally,
MSs served
by each
paging
sub-channel
and
interface, Um
and VLR.
a larger
value
is adopted
in continuous
prolonging
average
time of value
the MS
details
about
the calculation
coverage inthe
urban
areasservice
and a smaller
inbattery.
suburbs,For
rural
areas,
or blind
spots.
of the paging group, see GSM Rec. 05.02. But the delay of paging messages increases,
and the system performance deteriorates as the value of this parameter increases.
This
the
timeslots
between
consecutive
Thisparameter
parameterspecifies
should be
setnumber
on the of
basis
that the
paging the
channel
is not overloaded. In
transmissions
of channel
messages
by as
an small
MS. as possible. The load of the
addition, the value
of the request
parameter
should be
To
reduce
the collisions
the
RACH and
to improve
efficiency
of the
RACH,
antheof
paging
channels
should on
be
periodically
on reserved
the running
The
value
This
parameter
specifies
the
number
of measured
CCCH
blocks
for network.
the
AGCH.
After
access
is defined
in GSM on
Rec.
The
algorithm
specifies
three
this
parameter
should
beparameter
adjusted
the04.08.
basis
of the
load.
CCCH
isalgorithm
configured,
this
actually
indicates
the
CCCH
usage for
AGCH and
parameters:
Tx-integer
(Tbe
forsent
short),
maximum number
of cells
retransmissions
(RET),the
and S
A paging message
must
simultaneously
in all the
in an LAC. Thus,
PCH.
related
to
channel
combination.
capacity
of
the
paging
channel
in
a
cell,
that
is,
the
number
of
paging
sub-channels
in a
This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance.
Thismust
parameter
configuration
the cells
CCCHoftoan
determine
the parameter S.
cell,
be theworks
same with
as orthe
similar
to that in of
other
LAC.
This relations
parameter
specifies
the
NCCs to be
reported
by the MSsofinthe
a cell.
This
parameter
is
The
between
this
parameter
and
the configuration
CCCH
are
as follows:
an
information
element
2 and and
6 messages.
When
this parameter
is (IE)
set in
to the
3, 8,system
14, or information
50, S is 55 iftype
the CCCH
SDCCH do not
If
a bitainphysical
the value
of this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the corresponding
share
channel.
measurement
report
toisthe
value
of(CBA).
this
has a
byte
(eightshare
bits).a
When
this
parameter
set
to
3, The
8, 14,
or 50,
S is parameter
41 if the CCCH
and
SDCCH
This parameter specifies
theBTS.
cell
bar
access
Each
maps
with
an cell
NCCaccess
(0-7) and
the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit
physical
channel.
Valuebit
0 indicates
that
is allowed.
NWhen
is 0, the
MS
doesthat
notiscell
measure
cell
level
of ifNCC
this
parameter
setaccess
to 4, the
9,isor
6, allowed.
S is 76
the N.
CCCH and SDCCH do not share a
Value
1
indicates
not
physical
channel.
Together with CBQ, this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. For
When this
is set to 4, 9, or 6, S is 52 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical
details,
seeparameter
GSM Rec. 04.08.
channel.
isNormal
set to 5, 10, or 20, SNormal
is 109 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not
0When this parameter
0
share
a physical
channel.
0
1
Barred
Barred
isLow
set to 5, 10, or 20,Normal
S is 58 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a
1When this parameter
0
physical
channel.
1
1
Low
Normal
When this parameter is set to 6, 11, or 25, S is 163 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not
share a physical channel.
When this parameter is set to 6, 11, or 25, S is 86 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a
physical channel.
This
parameter
specifies
whether
to enable
Attach-detach
allowed
(ATT) do
function.
When
this parameter
is set
to 7, 12,
or 32, Sthe
is 217
if the CCCH
and SDCCH
not
For
different
cellschannel.
in the same LAC, their ATTs must be the same.
share
a physical
IfWhen
this parameter
is setistoset
Yes,
after
the MS
is a
this parameter
to network
7, 12, orconnection
32, S is 115isifnot
theprovided
CCCH and
SDCCH
share
powered
off, thus saving the network processing time and network resources.
physical channel.
The timeslot for sending messages is a random value from the collection of {0, 1,
MAX(T,
If
the TC8)-1}.
resources are changed before and after the handover, this needs to keep the
The duration
number of
(excluding
the timeslot
useddata
to send
messages)
between
test
fortimeslots
continuously
transmitting
the uplink
of the
old channel.
If TDMtwo
adjacent
channel
request
messages
is a random
value from
collection
ofIP{S, S+1,
transmission
is used
on the
Abis interface,
this parameter
is the
set to
10 ms; if
,
S+T-1}. is used on the Abis interface, this parameter is set to 20 ms.
transmission
When T increases, the interval between two adjacent channel requests increases, and
RACH conflicts decrease.
When S increases, the interval between two adjacent channel request messages
increases, and RACH conflicts decrease, thus improving the usage of AGCH and SDCCH.
The access time of the MS, however, is prolonged and the network performance is
decreased when T and S increase. Under normal conditions, an appropriate T value
should be used to ensure that S is as low as possible, and ensure that AGCH and SDCCH
are not overloaded.
When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRHR
encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the
ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRHR) timer expires, the timer T3109
(AMRHR) stops; if the timer T3109 (AMRHR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel.
When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRFR
encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the
ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRFR) timer expires, the timer T3109
(AMRFR) stops; if the timer T3109 (AMRFR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel.
In an intra-cell handover, the timer T3103C is initiated after the BSC receives the
HANDOVER COMMAND from target channel. The timer stops after the BSC receives the
HANDOVER COMPLETE message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover
failure message.
This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element
when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS.
After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message, the MS makes another
attempt to access the network after the timer expires.
For the call on the TCH in stable state, the timer is initiated when the ERROR
INDICATION, CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION, and RELEASE INDICATION messages
are received, and the call reestablishment allowed is set to Yes for the cell where the
call is. Upon receipt of a CLEAR COMMAND message from the MSC, the timer stops. The
BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST message after the timer expires.
This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the
channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected, and the purpose is to
reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections.
The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS.
the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires.
The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If the BSC
receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops; the BSC
deactivates the channel, if the timer T3109 expires.
This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a
handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. If the timer expires, the
outgoing BSC handover fails.
This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a
handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or
inter-BSC handover. If the timer expires, The MS reports a Clear REQ message.
After the BSC sends a handover command, the timer T3107 is initiated. Before the timer
T3107 expires, the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete
message. After the timer T3107 expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message.
In an outgoing BSC handover, after the BSC sends a handover request message, the
timer T7 is initiated. Before the timer T7 expires, the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a
handover acknowledgment message. After the timer T7 expires, the BSC sends an
outgoing BSC handover failure message.
In an intra-BSC handover, the timer T3103 is initiated after the BSC sends a handover
command. Before the timer T3103 expires, the timer stops if the BSC receives a
Handover Complete message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover failure
message.
The timer is initiated after the BSC sends the CR message; if the BSC receives the CC
message before the timer expires, the timer stops; if the timer expires, the BSS releases
the seized SDCCH channel.
This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure.
The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. If the BSC
receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires, T3101 is stopped; if T3101 expires
before the BSC receives an EST IND message, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH.
Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable.
Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Enable.
This
specifies
Qtru parameter
Signal Merge
Switchwhether a cell configured with baseband frequency hopping
supports
intelligent
consumption
decrease.
The QTRUthe
signal
merge power
algorithm
is to prevent
the calls with great difference between
uplink signal strengths from assigning in the same timeslot.

The BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5
second. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot the lowest uplink signal
strength of this timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels,
the situation must be recorded.
During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, a forced handover
is initiated on the calls with the highest uplink signal strength in the timeslot, and the
calls should be handed over to another timeslot.
P
specifies
the Observed
timemaximum
of uplink received
level
difference,
andthat
N specifies
This
parameter
specifies the
number of
paging
messages
a cell is the
Durationtoofsend
uplink
received
level difference.
allowed
within
a statistical
period.
This parameter specifies the average number of paging messages that a cell is allowed
to send within a statistical period.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of messages in the buffer of the cell
paging group packet when the Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface is turned on.
This parameter specifies the interval between two cell paging group packets, which is an
integral multiple of 50 ms.
The cell paging message packaging is determined by the system load. If the paging
message packaging timer is enabled, the paging messages are packaged according to
cells; otherwise, the paging messages are packaged according to the CPU.
This parameter specifies which type of interference band statistics algorithm to use, that
is, whether interference band statistics algorithm I or interference band statistics
algorithm II, when the frequency scanning function is enabled.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm after the
cell is out of service.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm if the cell
is out of service.
When this parameter is set to No, the BSC does not report a cell out-of-service alarm if
the cell is out of service.
This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS
services of low-level BTS for cascaded BTSs if the current-level sublink cannot be
preempted.
This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS
services.
This parameter specifies whether the MS is forced to send a handover access message.
This parameter specifies whether the MS can be handed over to another channel
through assignment procedure in intra-cell handover. If this parameter is set to Yes, the
assignment procedure can be used for all types of intra-cell handovers.
Frequency scanning refers to the scanning of uplink receive levels of cell frequencies.
The scanning result reflects the strength of frequency signals received by the cell.
This parameter specifies the scanning result type used from the start of a frequency
scanning task to the reporting of a scanning result.
Main/Diversity: current, minimum, maximum, and mean values of the main and diversity
levels during the scanning of main and diversity antennas
0
specifies optimization.
Maximum/Mean:
maximum and mean values of the uplink receive level
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-cell handover
timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
contained
the statistics of call drops.
0
specifiesin
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-BSC out-cell
handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
contained
0 specifiesin
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by outgoing-BSC
contained
0
specifiesin
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by incoming-BSC
contained
0 specifiesin
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by resource check are
not contained in the statistics of call drops.
contained
0 specifiesin
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by no MRs for a long
time for the MS are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
contained
0 specifiesin
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by forced handover
failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
contained
0 specifiesin
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by equipment fault
are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
contained
0 specifiesin
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by Abis territorial link
fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the connection failure message is sent by
the BTS because the release indication message is sent or the waiting period of call
reestablishment times out, the call drops caused by this reason are not contained in the
statistics of call drops.
0When
specifies
optimization.
the call
drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
1
specifiesin
nothe
optimization.
contained
statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are optimized,the call drops caused by the reasons except
for the radio link failure, handover access failure, OM intervention, and radio resource
unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
0
specifiesin
optimization.
contained
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio resource
unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
contained
0
specifiesin
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by OM intervention
contained
0 specifiesin
optimization.
In optimization, the call drops caused by handover access failure are not contained in
contained
0
specifiesin
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio link failure
contained
0 specifiesin
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by sequence error are
contained
0
specifiesin
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by unsolicited DM
response are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
contained
0 specifiesin
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by T200 timeout are
When
the call drop
counters
are not
call drops
by this
reason
This
parameter
specifies
whether
theoptimized,
repeater isthe
configured
in caused
a cell. The
function
of are
contained
the statistics
of call
drops.
repeater isinsimpler
than that
of BTS,
and the repeater is an extended equipment that is
used for the wide area or indoor application solving the problem of blind area. Not only
the repeater can improve the base station coverage, but also increase the total traffic
volume of network.
The setting of this parameter affects the handover. Because the distance between
repeaters is long, the handover between repeaters can only be asynchronous.
This
parameter
specifies the
Otherwise,
the handover
maydelay
fail. of TRX aiding detection performed after the cell is
initialized.
The cell is unstable after initialization; therefore, if the TRX aiding detection starts
immediately after cell initialization, a wrong decision might be made. In such a case, this
parameter is used to specify a delay.
This parameter specifies whether to allow flow control on the Abis interface.
The flow control function applies to the call management. When the BSS is congested,
some service requests are rejected or delayed so that the system load decreases. The
flow control on the Abis interface is mainly used to balance the system load caused by
Abis flow.
By default, flow control on the Abis interface is performed.
This parameter specifies whether to support the half-rate service in this cell. It is one of
the cell reselection parameters in the system information type 3 message.
This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power level of MSs. It is one of the cell
re-selection parameters in the system information type 3 message.
This parameter is used to control the transmit power of MSs. For details, see GSM Rec.
05.05.
In a GSM900 cell, the maximum power control level of the MS ranges from 0 to 19,
mapping to the following: {43,41,39,37,35,33,31,29,27,25,23,21,19,17,15,13,11,9,7,5}
respectively. Generally, the maximum transmit power supported by an MS is level 5
(mapping to 33 dBm). The minimum transmit power supported by an MS is level 19
(mapping to 5 dBm). Other transmit power levels are reserved for high-power MSs.
In a GSM1800 or GSM1900 cell, the maximum power control level of the MS ranges
from 0 to 31, mapping to the following:
This
parameter is contained in the Cell Options IE of the system information type 3 and
{30,28,26,24,22,20,18,16,14,12,10,8,6,4,2,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,36,34,32}
6
messages. Generally, the maximum transmit power supported by an MS is level 0
respectively.
If
this parameter
is setThe
to Yes,
the receive
level
of thesupported
MS equalsby
the
(mapping
to 30 dBm).
minimum
transmit
power
anmeasured
MS is levelreceive
15
level
in FHto
minus
the Other
receive
level obtained
from the
on the
BCCH TRX.
(mapping
0 dBm).
transmit
power levels
are timeslots
reserved for
high-power
MSs.
This parameter is imported with the requested bandwidth when the assignment request
is sent. The actual bandwidth assigned to a user is the value of multiplying the
requested bandwidth by the ActGene.
The parameter here is the value of the actual ActGene multiplied by 10 in fact. When
the resources are allocated in practice, the total bandwidth is expanded by ten times.
The effect of the ActGene is from 0.5 to 1.
This parameter specifies the priority of the PS low priority service.
This parameter specifies the priority of the PS high priority service.
This parameter specifies the priority of the CS data service.
This parameter specifies the priority of the CS voice service.
This parameter specifies the included angle formed by the major lobe azimuth of the
antennas in two cells under one BTS. The major lobe azimuth is measured from the
north to the direction of the cell antenna in a clockwise direction.
This parameter is calculated according to the Included Angle and the actual Antenna
Azimuth Angle. The Included Angle refers to the coverage area of the cell.
Antenna Azimuth Angle = actual Antenna Azimuth Angle - Included Angle/2
This parameter specifies the number of RACH burst timeslots in a RACH load
measurement.
The value of this parameter indicates the interval during which the BSC determines
whether an RACH timeslot is busy. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.
This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send the overload indication
message to the BSC.
The overload causes include TRX processor overload, downlink CCCH overload, and
AGCH overload. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.
This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot,
that is, the load of the access requests on the RACH and the load of all the messages
(such as paging messages and packet immediate assignment messages) on the PCH.
For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.
If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the value of this parameter, the BTS periodically
sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. The interval for sending the CCCH
This
parameter
specifies
the
interval
for sending
the overload messages.
overload
message
is CCCH
Load
Indication
Period(s).
This parameter is used by a BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot.For
details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the CCCH Load
Threshold, the BTS periodically sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. The
CCCH overload messages include the uplink RACH overload messages and the downlink
PCH overload messages.
This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send radio resource indication
messages, informing the BSC of the interference levels on idle channels of a TRX. In the
radio resource indication message, the TRX reports the interference level of each idle
channel in the measurement period.
The value of this parameter has 16 bits. The most significant bit indicates whether the
parameter is valid. Bits 14-8 indicate the level threshold. Bits 7-0 indicate the BER
threshold.
The BTS adjusts the MS frequency according to the value of this parameter.
This parameter is used for the fast-moving handover decision. If this parameter is set to
Yes, the BTS calculates the speed at which the MS moves towards or away from the
BTS, and reports the speed to the BSC through the uplink MR.
This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm.
This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the
antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. If this parameter is set to a small value,
the error is small.
This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the
antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty.
This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. When the output power
of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is generated.The Power
output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds
of the error.If the value of this parameter is greater, the error is smaller.
When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is
generated.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold
indicate the two thresholds of the error.
For the BTS2X, this parameter is used to compensate the difference of RSSI between the
time the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) is installed and the time the TMA is not
installed.
The value of this parameter when the tower-mounted amplifier is not installed is 3
greater than that when the tower-mounted amplifier is installed.
This parameter specifies the start frame number of the BTS. It is used to synchronize
the MS and the BTS after the BTS is re-initialized.
The frame offset technology arranges the frame numbers of different cells under the
same BTS to be different from one another by one frame offset. Thus, the FCH and SCH
signals
of adjacent
cells do
appear in
the same
frameby
to which
facilitate
This parameter
specifies
thenot
maximum
number
of levels
the the
BTSMS
RFdecoding.
power
decreases. The decrease in the BTS RF power is implemented through dynamic power
control and static power control.
For the BTS2X, this parameter is shielded. For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS,
this parameter is invalid.
For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS, power control is performed on the basis of
This
parameter
the power
level specifies
of a TRX. the period during which interference levels are averaged.
This
parameter
specifies
threshold
used
for interference
Before
the BTS sends
thethe
radio
resource
indication
message measurement.
to the BSC, the interference
The
BSS
the uplink
quality
of the
radio channels
occupied are
by MSs,
calculates
levels
onmeasures
the idle channels
in the
period
specified
by this parameter
averaged.
The
and
reports
the
level on eachlevels
of theonidle
This helps
the BSC to
result
is used
to interference
classify the interference
thechannels.
idle channels
into five
assign
channels.
interference
bands.
According
theGSM
strength
of interference
signals,
For details,tosee
Rec. 08.08,
08.58, and
12.21.the interference signals are classified
into
interference
levels.
values of
these
are called
Interf. Band Thresholds.
This six
parameter
specifies
theThe
threshold
used
for levels
interference
measurement.
The
BTS
determines
the
interference
level
based
on
these
thresholds.
BTS,
then,
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied byThe
MSs,
calculates
sends
a radio
resource
indication
tothe
theidle
BSC.
The BSC This
compares
the BSC
busytoand
and reports
the
interference
level message
on each of
channels.
helps the
idle
channels
reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication
assign
channels.
message
to
determine
whether
to performsignals,
a handover.
The interference
band
According to the strength
of interference
the interference
signals
are classified
measurement
result levels.
provides
reference
threshold
andInterf.
interference
analysis.
into six interference
The
values offor
these
levels setting
are called
Band Thresholds.
For
details,
see
GSM
Rec.
08.08,
08.58,
and
12.21.
The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then,
If
the difference
between
the values
of two to
thresholds
small,
the interference
is
sends
a radio resource
indication
message
the BSC. are
Thetoo
BSC
compares
the busy and
too
the difference
the values
twointhresholds
are too great,
the
idle obvious.
channelsIfreported
in the between
measurement
reportofand
the radio resource
indication
interference
is not reflected.
message to determine
whether to perform a handover. The interference band
measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis.
For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is
too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the
interference is not reflected.

The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates
and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to
assign channels.
According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified
into
interference
levels.
values of
these
are called
Interf. Band Thresholds.
This six
parameter
specifies
theThe
threshold
used
for levels
interference
measurement.
The BSS
BTS determines
theuplink
interference
level
on these thresholds.
BTS,
then,
The
measures the
quality of
thebased
radio channels
occupied byThe
MSs,
calculates
sends
a radio
resource
indication
tothe
theidle
BSC.
The BSC This
compares
the BSC
busytoand
and reports
the
interference
level message
on each of
channels.
helps the
idle
channels
reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication
assign
channels.
message
whether
to performsignals,
a handover.
The interference
band
Accordingtotodetermine
the strength
of interference
the interference
signals
are classified
measurement
result levels.
provides
reference
for
threshold
setting
andInterf.
interference
analysis.
into
six
interference
The
values
of
these
levels
are
called
Band
This
parameter
specifies
the
threshold
used
for interference measurement. Thresholds.
For
details,
see GSM
Rec.interference
08.08,
08.58,
andbased
12.21.
The
BTS
determines
the
level
on
these
thresholds.
The
BTS,
then,
The
measures
the uplink
qualityof
oftwo
the thresholds
radio channels
occupied
by
calculates
If theBSS
difference
between
the values
are
small,
theMSs,
interference
is
sends
a radio
resource
indication
message
tothe
theidle
BSC.
Thetoo
BSC
compares
the BSC
busytoand
and
reports
the
interference
level
on
each
of
channels.
This
helps
the
too
obvious.
Ifreported
the difference
between
the values
ofand
twointhresholds
are too great,
the
idle
channels
in
the
measurement
report
the
radio
resource
indication
assign
channels.
interference
is not reflected.
message
whether
to performsignals,
a handover.
The interference
band
the strength
of interference
the interference
signals
are classified
measurement
result levels.
provides
reference
for
threshold
setting
andInterf.
interference
analysis.
into
six
interference
The
values
of
these
levels
are
called
Band
Thresholds.
This
parameter
specifies
the
threshold
used
for
interference
measurement.
For details,
see GSM the
Rec.interference
08.08, 08.58,
andbased
12.21.
The
BTS
determines
level
on
these
thresholds.
The
BTS,
then,
The
measures
the uplink
qualityof
oftwo
the thresholds
radio channels
occupied
by
calculates
If
theBSS
difference
between
the values
are
too
small,
theMSs,
interference
is
sends
a
radio
resource
indication
message
to
the
BSC.
The
BSC
compares
the
busy
and obvious.
reports the
interference
level
on each
of the idle
channels.
Thisare
helps
BSCthe
toand
too
Ifreported
the
difference
between
the values
ofand
two
thresholds
toothe
great,
idle
channels
in
the
measurement
report
in
the
radio
resource
indication
assign
channels.
interference
is not reflected.
message
whether
to performsignals,
a handover.
The interference
band
the strength
of interference
the interference
signals
are classified
measurement
result
provides
reference
for
threshold
setting
and
interference
analysis.
into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds.
For
see GSM the
Rec.interference
08.08, 08.58,
andbased
12.21.
The details,
BTS determines
level
on these thresholds. The BTS, then,
If
the difference
betweenindication
the valuesmessage
of two thresholds
are
tooBSC
small,
the interference
reports
a radio resource
to the BSC.
The
compares
the busy is
too
obvious.
If
the
difference
between
the
values
of
two
thresholds
are
too
great,
and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource the
interference
is not reflected.
indication message
to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band
measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis.
For
details, seeCell
GSM
Rec.
08.08,
08.58,
12.21.
If
Assignment
Load
Judge
Enable
is and
set to
Yes, the directed try procedure is started
If
the following
differencetwo
between
the values
of two
arethe
toodirected
small, the
is
if the
conditions
are met:
The thresholds
cell supports
tryinterference
procedure. The
too
obvious.
If the
difference
between
the
values
of
two thresholds
are too
great, the
load
of
the
cell
is
greater
than
or
equal
to
the
Cell
Direct
Try
Forbidden
Threshold.
This
parameter
specifies
whether to support DRX. To reduce the power consumption,
interference
is not
reflected.
the discontinuous reception mechanism (DRX) is introduced to the GSM. The MS that
supports the DRX consumes less power to receive broadcast messages that the MSs are
interested in. This prolongs the service time of the MS battery.
This
specifiesthe
theDRX
data
service
supported.
The parameter
BSC that supports
should
send
the dispatching message to MSs so that
This
value
of use
the the
parameter
can be The
set as
required.
the MSs
can
DRX function.
period
occupied by broadcast short messages
0000000001:
indicates
that only themessage
NT14.5Kisdata
service
is supported.
that are contained
in a dispatching
called
a dispatching
period. The
0000000010:
indicates
only
the NT12K
data
service are
is supported.
description and
positionthat
of the
broadcast
short
message
contained in the
0000000100:
indicates
only the sequence.
NT6K data service is supported.
dispatching message
inthat
the sending
0000001000: indicates that only the T14.4K data service is supported.
0001000000:
indicates
that
only the
data service
is supported.
If
this parameter
is set to
StartUp,
theT2.4K
BTS transmit
power
is adjusted to the maximum
0010000000:
only the
T1.2K data
service
is addition,
supported.
before the BSCindicates
sends a that
handover
command
to the
MS. In
the BTS transmit
0100000000:
indicatesduring
that only
the T600BITS
data service
is supported.
power is not adjusted
the handover
to ensure
the success
of the handover.
1000000000:
indicates
that
only
the
T1200/75
data
service
is
supported.
When the receive level of an MS drops rapidly, a handover occurs. In this case, the BSC
cannot adjust the transmit power of the MS and BTS in time. The MS may fail to receive
the handover command, thus leading to the call drop.
This parameter specifies whether the BTS reports the voice quality index (VQI). If this
parameter is set to Report, the BTS reports the VQI. The BSC measures the traffic on a
per VQI basis. There are 11 levels of speech quality. If the level is low, the speech
quality is good. The traffic related to AMR and non-AMR is measured separately, and
thus the speech quality is monitored.
This parameter specifies whether to permit the low noise amplifier (LNA) bypass.
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies
participate in FH is 8. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell,
the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC
needs to consider this gain.
participate in FH is 1.When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell,
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC
increases the uplink transmit power.
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC
decreases the uplink transmit power.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink
receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink
receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the uplink
receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink
This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive
quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive
quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the uplink receive
quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive
When the receive level is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is
performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm
to -47 dBm).
When the receive level is higher than the threshold, Huawei III power control is
to -47 dBm).
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the uplink
power control.
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the uplink
power control.
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of
downlink receive quality.
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of uplink
receive level.
This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive quality exponential
filtering formula.
This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive level exponential filtering
formula.
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step when the BSC
increases the downlink power.
This parameter specifies the maximum allowed adjustment step when the BSC
decreases the downlink transmit power.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the downlink
When the receive level is higher than the threshold, the downlink power control is
to -47 dBm).
When the receive level is higher than the threshold, the downlink power control is
to -47 dBm).
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the downlink
power control.
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the downlink
power control.
downlink receive quality.
downlink receive level.
This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive quality exponential
filtering formula.
This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive level exponential
filtering formula.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the TCH in
a power control period.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the SDCCH
in a power control period.
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power
control commands.
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power
control commands.
When the number of missing MRs in a power control period exceeds the value of this
parameter, the power control stops.
This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS.
0-16 (0 dB to 30 dB in steps of 2 dB)
In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to DL
In
downlink
power
control,the
if the
downlink
receive Upper
qualityThreshold
is greatercontains
than or equal
to this
Qual.
Bad Trig
Threshold,
value
of DL RX_LEV
the value
of
threshold,
then
the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL Qual. Bad
DL Qual. Bad
UpLEVDiff.
UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power
control.
In
uplink
power
control,
if 6.4%
the uplink
receive quality is greater than or equal to UL Qual.
Level
6: BER
ranges
from
to 12.8%
Bad
Trig
Threshold,
then
UL RX_LEV
Threshold
contain
Qual.
Level
7:
BER
greatercontrol,
thanthe
12.8%
In
the
uplink
power
ifactual
the uplink
receiveUpper
quality
is greatershould
than or
equal UL
to this
Bad
UpLEVDiff.
threshold,
then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.
This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control.
This
specifies
maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the
Levelparameter
7: BER greater
thanthe
12.8%
receive quality.
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the
receive level.
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the
receive quality.
This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the
quality zone 2 (the RQ value is greater than or equal to 3) based on the signal level.
In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0,
1-2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum
permissible down adjustment step.
When
the downward
power
is performed
based on step
the level,
the maximum
This parameter
specifies
theadjustment
AMR maximum
down adjustment
permitted
by the
permissible
differs
based
onless
the than
receive
quality.
quality zonedown
1 (theadjustment
RQ value isstep
greater
than
0 and
3) based
on the signal level.
This
parameter
the maximum
step
decreasing
theinto
signal
level
in (0,
In the
Huawei II specifies
power control
algorithm,
thelength
qualityinzone
is divided
three
grades
power
when
thereceive
RQ is 2.quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum
1-2, control
3) based
on the
permissible down adjustment step.
When the downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum
permissible
down
adjustment
step differs
based
on in
thedecreasing
receive quality.
This parameter
specifies
the maximum
step
length
the signal level in
This
parameter
specifies
theismaximum
step length in decreasing the signal level in
power
control when
the RQ
0.
power
control
when
thecontrol
RQ
is is
1.
When
power
control
step
calculatedthe
based
on the
signal
quality,
the
upper
In
the the
Huawei
II power
algorithm,
quality
zone
is divided
into
three
grades (0,
threshold
and the
threshold
of the
stable
state
quality
zone
set. When
the
1-2, 3) based
onlower
the receive
quality
(RQ).
Every
quality
zone
hasare
different
maximum
signal
quality
exceeds
the upper
threshold or is below the lower threshold, power
permissible
down
adjustment
step.
control
is performed.
This parameter
specifies
the lower
threshold
of thethe
downlink
When the
downward power
adjustment
is performed
based
on the level,
maximum
quality
for power
permissible
down control.
adjustment step differs based on the receive quality.
The
mapping
between
the
BER
the quality
level
is assignal
follows:
When
the power
control
step
is and
calculated
based
on the
quality, the upper
Level 0: BER
than
0.2% of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality
threshold
andsmaller
the lower
threshold
Level
1:
BER
ranges
from
0.2%
to
0.4%
exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is
Level 2: BER
ranges
from 0.4%
to 0.8%
performed.
This
parameter
specifies
the upper threshold of the downlink quality for
Level 3:
BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%
power
control.
Level
4:
BER
ranges
from
1.6%
to
3.2%
Level
Level 5:
0: BER
BER ranges
smaller from
than 3.2%
0.2% to 6.4%
Level
Level 6:
1: BER
BER ranges
ranges from
from 6.4%
0.2% to
to 12.8%
0.4%
Level
than 0.4%
12.8%
Level 7:
2: BER
BER greater
ranges from
to 0.8%
The
power
control
step
is calculated
based on the signal level. The signal level has an
Level
4: BER
ranges
from
1.6% to 3.2%
upper
and afrom
lower
threshold.
Level threshold
5: BER ranges
3.2%
to 6.4%Power control is not performed if the signal level
isLevel
between
theranges
upperfrom
threshold
the lower threshold. Power control is performed only
6: BER
6.4% and
to 12.8%
when
signal
level than
exceeds
the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
Level the
7: BER
greater
12.8%
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an
When
power and
control
stepthreshold.
is calculated
based
on the
signal
quality, the
upper
upper the
threshold
a lower
Power
control
is not
performed
if the
signal level
threshold
lower
threshold
ofthe
thelower
quality
zone arePower
set. When
theissignal
qualityonly
is betweenand
thethe
upper
threshold
and
threshold.
control
performed
exceeds
upper
threshold
is below
lower threshold,
control
is
when thethe
signal
level
exceedsorthe
upper the
threshold
or is belowpower
the lower
threshold.
performed.
This parameter
the
lower
threshold
of the uplink quality for power
The level values
0 through specifies
63 map to
-110
dBm
to -47 dBm.
control.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper
The mapping
BER andofthe
as set.
follows:
threshold
andbetween
the lowerthe
threshold
thequality
qualitylevel
zoneisare
When the signal quality
Level 0: the
BERupper
smaller
than 0.2%
exceeds
threshold
or is below the lower threshold, power control is
performed.
Levelparameter
2: BER ranges
from 0.4%
0.8%quality upper threshold of the quality zone.
This
determines
the to
uplink
Level
BER
ranges
from
to 1.6%
Note: 3:
The
power
of the
MS0.8%
and the
BTS is adjusted according to the quality and the
LevelFor
4: BER
ranges
from
1.6%
to 3.2%
level.
details,
refer
to the
Power
Control 2nd Generation Control table.
Levelmapping
5: BER ranges
from
to 6.4%
The
between
the3.2%
BER and
the quality level is as follows:
Level
Level 6:
0: BER
BER ranges
smaller from
than 6.4%
0.2% to 12.8%
Level
than 0.2%
12.8%
Level 7:
1: BER
BER greater
ranges from
to 0.4%
The
control
step
is calculated
Levelpower
3: BER
ranges
from
0.8% to 1.6%
upper
threshold
and from
a lower
threshold.
Level 4:
BER ranges
1.6%
to 3.2% Power control is not performed if the signal level
is
between
the
upperfrom
threshold
and
Level
5: BER
ranges
3.2% to
6.4%
when
theBER
signal
levelfrom
exceeds
upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
Level 6:
ranges
6.4%the
to 12.8%
The
values
0 through
63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
Levellevel
7: BER
greater
than 12.8%
upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level
is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only
when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
This parameter specifies the number of downlink measurement reports used for
predicting the level in power control.
In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history
measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction
function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment.
This parameter specifies the number of uplink measurement reports used for predicting
This
parameter
specifies
the level
in power
control.whether the compensation of AMR measurement reports is
allowed
byIIHuawei
II poweralgorithm,
control algorithm.
In Huawei
power control
the average filter value in the history
When
this parameter
is not
set used
to Yes,
Huawei
II power
control
algorithm
puts the
measurement
report is
forthe
power
control
decision.
Instead,
the prediction
currently
reports in thethe
measurement
report
compensation
function isreceived
applied measurement
in the filter to compensate
delay of power
adjustment.
queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and
the BTS power in the measurement report. After values are added in the measurement
report, compensate the receive level value in the history measurement report based on
the change of the power.
When determining whether to perform power control, the BSC performs weighted
filtering on the values of the receive level and of the receive quality in several history
measurement reports. The measurement reports may be obtained at different transmit
power
of the BTS/MS.
To ensure
the accuracy
of the values
for sampled
filtering, for
thecalculating
values in the
This parameter
specifies
the number
of measurement
reports
history
measurement
reports
that are
obtained
a different
transmit
from the
the
average
value of the
downlink
signal
qualityat
before
the BTS
power power
adjustment.
current power must be compensated.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating
the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.
the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.
the average value of the uplink signal strength before the AMR MS power adjustment.
This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous AMR power
control commands.
This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the
BTS.Class 0 to class 15 corresponds to 0 dB to 30 dB, with a step of 2 dB. If this
parameter is set 5, the power ranges from class 0 to class 4.
In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is higher than or equal to the
In
control, if the
receive
quality
is greater
than
or equal
the
DLdownlink
Qual. Badpower
Trig Threshold,
the downlink
value of DL
RX_LEV
Upper
Threshold
contains
thetovalue
value
parameter,
then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL
of the of
DLthis
Qual.
Bad UpLEVDiff.
Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the
downlink power control.
In
uplink
power
control,
if 6.4%
the uplink
receive quality is higher than or equal to the UL
Level
6: BER
ranges
from
to 12.8%
In
the Bad
uplink
power
control,
if the
quality
is greater
thanshould
or equal
to theUL
Qual.
Trig
Threshold,
theuplink
actualreceive
UL RX_LEV
Upper
Threshold
contain
Level
7:
BER
greater
than then
12.8%
value
of this
parameter, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual Bad
Qual. Bad
UpLEVDiff.
UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power
control.
This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the
signal quality.
This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the
receive level.
This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on
the receive quality.
In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 12, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is
set for each quality zone.
When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum
permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality.
This
parameter
determines
the maximum
permissible
down
adjustment
step
when(0,
RQ1-is
In Huawei
II power
control algorithm,
the quality
zone is
divided
into three
grades
2.
2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is
set for each quality zone.
When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum
permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality.
This
parameter
determines
the maximum
permissible
down
adjustment
step
when(0,
RQ1-is
In Huawei
II power
control algorithm,
the quality
zone is
divided
into three
grades
1.
2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is
After
BSCquality
delivers
the power control command, it should wait for a certain period
set
forthe
each
zone.
before
receiving an
acknowledgement
message. Therefore,
thelevel,
MR that
control
When downward
power
adjustment is performed
based on the
the power
maximum
decision
is based
cannot accurately
reflect
the
environment
of the BTS during
permissible
down on
adjustment
step differs
based
onradio
the receive
quality.
the
adjustment,
but misses
the latest
changes of
the receive
levelstep
and when
receive
Thispower
parameter
determines
the maximum
permissible
down
adjustment
RQ is
quality
of the BTS. Thus, the power adjustment is delayed.
0.
To
compensate
the delay
power
adjustment,
the power
control
algorithm
implements
After
the BSC delivers
the of
power
control
command,
it should
wait for
a certain
period
the prediction
and
function. In message.
other words,
the BSCthe
samples
several
before
receiving
anfiltering
acknowledgement
Therefore,
MR that
powerdownlink
control
measurement
reports,
performs
weighted
filtering,
and predicts
N measurement
reports
decision is based
on cannot
accurately
reflect
the radio
environment
of the BTS during
from
the current
time onwards
in athe
short
period.
the power
adjustment,
but misses
latest
changes of the receive level and receive
This parameter
determines
the number
of downlink
measurement reports predicted by
quality
of the MS.
Thus, the power
adjustment
is delayed.
the
BSC. The value
this of
parameter
equals to the
number
N.
To compensate
the of
delay
power adjustment,
the previous
power control
algorithm
implements
In Huawei
II power
control function.
algorithm,Inthe
average
in the history
the
prediction
and filtering
other
words,filter
the value
BSC samples
several uplink
measurement
report
is
not
used
for
power
control
decision.
Instead,
the
prediction
measurement reports, performs weighted filtering, and predicts N measurement reports
function
applied
in the
filter to
the delay of power adjustment.
from
the is
current
time
onwards
incompensate
athe
short
period.
This parameter
specifies
whether
compensation
of measurement reports is allowed
This
parameter
determines
the
number
of
uplink
measurement reports predicted by the
by Huawei II power control algorithm.
BSC.
In
other
words,
the
value
of
this
parameter
equals
toBSC
the previous
N.
When determining whether to perform power control, the
performsnumber
weighted
In Huawei
power
control
the average
filter
valuequality
in the in
history
filtering
on IIthe
values
of thealgorithm,
receive level
and of the
receive
several history
measurement
is The
not measurement
used for powerreports
controlmay
decision.
Instead,bythe
measurement report
reports.
be obtained
theprediction
BTS/MS at
function
appliedpower.
in the filter
to compensate
the of
delay
power
different is
transmit
To ensure
the accuracy
the of
values
foradjustment.
filtering, the values in
the history measurement reports that are obtained at a different transmit power from
the current power must be compensated.
the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.
the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.
the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.
the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper
This
parameter
specifies
whether enable
Huaweizone
II power
control
algorithm
or Huawei
threshold
and the
lower threshold
of the quality
are set.
When
the signal
quality III
power
control
algorithm.
exceeds
the upper
threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is
performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for
power control.
The
mapping
between
the
BER
the quality
level
is assignal
follows:
When
the power
control
step
is and
calculated
based
on the
quality, the upper
Level 0: BER
than
threshold
andsmaller
the lower
threshold
Level 1: the
BERupper
ranges
from 0.2%
tobelow
0.4% the lower threshold, power control is
exceeds
threshold
or is
Level 2: BER
ranges
from 0.4%
to 0.8%
performed.
This
parameter
specifies
the upper threshold of the downlink quality for
Level 3:
BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%
power
control.
Level
4:
BER
ranges
from
1.6%
to
3.2%
Level
Level 5:
0: BER
BER ranges
smaller from
than 3.2%
0.2% to 6.4%
Level
Level 6:
1: BER
BER ranges
ranges from
from 6.4%
0.2% to
to 12.8%
0.4%
Level
than 0.4%
12.8%
Level 7:
2: BER
BER greater
ranges from
to 0.8%

The
power
control
step
is calculated
Level
4: BER
ranges
from
1.6% to 3.2%
upper
and afrom
lower
threshold.
Level threshold
5: BER ranges
3.2%
isLevel
between
theranges
upperfrom
threshold
6: BER
6.4% and
to 12.8%
when
signal
level than
exceeds
Level the
7: BER
greater
12.8%
When
power and
control
stepthreshold.
is calculated
based
on the
signal
quality, the
upper
upper the
threshold
a lower
Power
control
is not
performed
if the
signal level
threshold
lower
threshold
ofthe
thelower
quality
zone arePower
set. When
theissignal
qualityonly
is betweenand
thethe
upper
threshold
and
threshold.
control
performed
exceeds
upper
threshold
is below
lower threshold,
control
is
when thethe
signal
level
exceedsorthe
upper the
threshold
or is belowpower
the lower
threshold.
performed.
This parameter
the
lower
threshold
of the uplink quality for power
The level values
0 through specifies
63 map to
-110
dBm
to -47 dBm.
control.
The
mapping
between
the
BER
the quality
level
is assignal
follows:
When
the power
control
step
is and
calculated
based
on the
quality, the upper
Level 0: BER
than
threshold
andsmaller
the lower
threshold
Level
1:
BER
ranges
from
0.2%
to
0.4%
exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is
Level 2: BER
ranges
from 0.4%
to 0.8%
performed.
This
parameter
specifies
the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power
control.
Level
4:
BER
ranges
from
1.6%
to
3.2%
Level
Level 5:
0: BER
BER ranges
smaller from
than 3.2%
0.2% to 6.4%
Level
Level 6:
1: BER
BER ranges
ranges from
from 6.4%
0.2% to
to 12.8%
0.4%
Level
than 0.4%
12.8%
Level 7:
2: BER
BER greater
ranges from
to 0.8%
The
power
control
step
is calculated
Level
4: BER
ranges
from
1.6% to 3.2%
upper
and afrom
lower
threshold.
Level threshold
5: BER ranges
3.2%
isLevel
between
theranges
upperfrom
threshold
6: BER
6.4% and
to 12.8%
when
signal
level than
exceeds
Level the
7: BER
greater
12.8%
upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level
is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only
when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power
control commands.
This parameter specifies the constant of filtering the collision signal strength for power
control. The MS obtains valid measurement signals by sampling for NAVGI times.
This parameter specifies the channel where the receive power level of the MS is
measured for the uplink power control.
This parameter specifies the reduced power of the BTS on the PBCCH.
This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the transfer mode, which is
used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet transfer mode.
This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter
the signal level in the packet transfer mode. This parameter is used when the MS
measures the downlink signal strength in the packet transfer mode and calculates Cn of
the
output power.
Thethe
parameter
specifies
theperiod
relation
Cnidle
andmode,
Cn-1. which
ThisMS
parameter
specifies
signal strength
filter
in between
the packet
is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet idle mode.
This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter
the signal level in the idle mode. This parameter is used when the MS measures the
downlink signal strength in the packet idle mode and calculates Cn of the MS output
power. The parameter specifies the relation between Cn and Cn-1.
This parameter specifies the initial power level.
This parameter determines the expected receive signal strength on the BTS when the
MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control.
This parameter is used for the open-loop power control.
The MS uses the Alpha parameter to calculate the output power of the uplink PDCH,
namely, PCH.
When the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control, this parameter determines the
This
parameter
the maximum
of N3105.
reduced
level ofspecifies
the MS transmit
power value
mapping
to the path loss.
After a downlink TBF is established, the network initiates the N3105.
Upon setting the RRBP field in the downlink RLC data block, the network resets the
N3105 when it receives the packet acknowledgment message from the MS on the uplink
RLC data block corresponding to the RRBP field; otherwise, the network increases N3105
This
parameter
specifies
the maximum
valueinofwhich
the N3103.
by one
and resends
the downlink
data block
the RRBP field is set.
Upon
the last RLC
block
when the
transmission
is complete,
the
Whenreceiving
N3105 overflows,
thedata
network
initiates
theuplink
T3195.
When the timer
T3195 expires,
network
sends
MS a Packet
Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 and initiates the
the current
TBFthe
abnormally
releases.
N3103.
If the network does not receive a packet control acknowledgment message within
scheduled
time,specifies
the N3103
byvalue
one and
the network resends the Packet Uplink
This
parameter
theincreases
maximum
of N3101.
Ack/Nack
message.
In uplink dynamic
assignment mode, the multiple MSs can share one uplink channel if
When
this counter
overflows,
the
initiates the T3169. When this timer expires,
the
downlink
data blocks
carry
thenetwork
USF
value.
This
parameter
the
release
delay
of the downlink TBF.
the
current
TBF specifies
abnormally
releases.
After
the
network
starts
to
assign
a
USF
value
the
uplink TBF
(uplink
TBF is data
After sending the last downlink RLC data block to
and
confirming
that
all downlink
established),
the
N3101
is
initiated.
The
network
reserves
the
RLC
uplink
blocks this
blocks are received, the network does not immediately notify the MS of releasing
mapping
to each set
USFthe
forlast
the data
uplink
datanot
sent
from the
MS. If thekeep
network
valid
TBF but forcedly
block
received.
Therefore,
this receives
TBF
uplink
data by
blocks
from the MS,
the network
resets
the N3101;
otherwise,
the
N3101
unreleased
continuously
resending
the last
downlink
data block
with the
Relative
increases
by one.
Reserved Block
Period (RRBP) flag. During the release delay of a downlink TBF, as long
When
this counter
overflows,
the has
current
uplink
TBF
abnormally
releases.
This
parameter
specifies
inactive
period
of the
extended
uplink
TBF.
as
the
upper
layer
of
the the
network
a requirement
of
downlink
data
transmission, the
Upon
receiving
the last
blocks
(CountValue=0)
from
thesame
MS that
extracted
downlink
RLC uplink
blocksRLC
can data
be sent
on this
downlink TBF.
At the
time, the
supports
extendedTBF
uplink
TBF function,
the network
does
not release
this uplink
status of the downlink
changes
from release
delay to
downlink
transmission.
In TBF
immediately
but the
set release
it to thedelay,
inactive
To transmit
uplink
RLC data
blocks
addition, during
themode.
MS must
send thethe
Packet
Downlink
Ack/Nack
during
inactive
cancorresponding
use this TBF that
automatically
becomes
message
on theperiod,
uplink the
dataMS
block
to the
RRBP to maintain
theactive
instead
of establishing
new uplink
TBF. When
thethe
inactive
period
no uplink
communication
with thea network.
Therefore,
when
MS needs
toexpires,
send theif uplink
RLC
block
needs
to berequest
transmitted,
theChannel
networkRequest
sends the
MS a Packet
Uplink
data,data
it can
send
an uplink
through
Description
carried
in Ac
the
message
with FAI=1
to notify
the MS of releasing the uplink TBF. In addition, when an
Packet Downlink
Ack/Nack
message.
uplink
TBF 0
is specifies
inactive,
a downlink
TBF
canfunction
still
establish
this uplink
TBF.
The parameter
value
that
release
delay
of the on
downlink
TBF is
disabled.
This
specifies
the
release
delay
of the
non-extended
uplink
TBF.
The extended
TBF
function
improve the network
KPIs, especially
for
Upon
receivinguplink
the last
uplink
RLC can
datagreatly
block (CountValue=0),
the network
sends the
the
discontinuous
uplink
transmission
(such
as
interactive
transmission
and
Ping)
MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 to notify the MS of releasing this
services.
uplink TBF. To establish the downlink TBF on the unreleased uplink TBF, the network will
The value
0 specifies
thatthis
the uplink
extended
TBF function
disabled
(Also deactivate
notify
the MS
of releasing
TBFuplink
for a period
of delayisafter
this parameter
is set.
this
function
on
the
BSC
side).
After the downlink TBF establishes successfully or after the delay time exceeds the
setting time of non-extended uplink TBF, this uplink TBF will automatically release.
The value 0 specifies that the release delay of the non-extended uplink TBF is disabled.
This parameter specifies that the MS performs the load-based cell reselection can be
controlled. The load-based cell reselection is available to the MSs that the receive level
is lower than this threshold.
This parameter is used to collect the statistics of GPRS transmission quality. If the
receive quality is equal to or greater than this threshold, you can infer that the
transmission quality is worsened.
This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE 8PSK transmission quality. If the
MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission
quality is worsened.
This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE GMSK transmission quality. If the
MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission
quality is worsened.
This parameter specifies the interval between two NC2 cell reselections in a cell.
This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive level of the serving cell is
lower than the level threshold of cell reselection within the Normal Cell Reselection
Watch Period; If the number of times is lower than this parameter, the cell reselection is
allowed.
This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive levels of the serving cell
are continuously calculated before the P/N criterion is determined.
This parameter specifies whether enabling the normal cell reselection algorithm is
allowed.
This parameter specifies whether enabling the cell load-based reselection algorithm is
allowed.
This parameter specifies whether enabling the critical cell reselection algorithm is
allowed.
This parameter specifies whether a 2G cell or 3G cell is selected in the inter-RAT cell
reselection procedure.
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in
neighbor cells.
This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost. If the
number of consecutive MRs that are lost exceeds this parameter, the previous MR is
thought to be invalid.
This parameter specifies that if the cell load is lower than this threshold, the cell can
receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection. That is, the cell will
receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection if the TBF
multiplexing rate is lower than corresponding percentage.
The load-based reselection is enabled when the cell load is higher than this threshold.
This parameter specifies that the accumulatively calculated number of times that the
downlink transmission quality of MS is lower than the transmission quality threshold of
MS. The critical reselection needs to be performed when the ratio of the accumulatively
calculated number of times and the number of times in the downlink transmission
quality measurement report reaches this threshold.
This parameter specifies that the Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed can be determined
when the transmission quality in the received downlink transmission quality
measurement report is lower than this threshold.
This parameter specifies the penalty duration for the cell reselection. The cell penalty
can be performed within the Cell Penalty Last Time only.
This parameter specifies the signal level for target cell penalty after the BSC receives
the cell reselection failure message or after the cell initiates the load-based reselection.
This parameter is valid only within the Cell Penalty Last Time.
To avoid ping-pong handovers, when this parameter specifies the cell reselection, the
level of the target cell should higher than the total of the Min Access Level Threshold
and the Cell Reselection Hysterisis.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as
This
parameter
whether to support the QoS optimization.
a candidate
cell specifies
for handover.
The GPRS GSN provides different subscribers with flexible QoS mechanism. The QoS
level is determined in the subscription.
The QoS control parameters include the service priority class, reliability class, delay
class, and throughput class.
During the negotiation of a QoS profile, an MS can apply a value for each QoS attribute.
This
specifies
the
policy
thethe
handover
the aunderlaid
Afterparameter
receiving the
request
from
theofMS,
networkbetween
negotiates
class for subcell
each and
the
overlaid
subcell
inprofile
a PS domain.
attribute
of each
QoS
based on the current effective GPRS resources. The
In
version
V9R8, the
supports
theprofile
PDCH with
configured
in the overlaid
subcell or in the
network
provides
theBSC
negotiated
QoS
corresponding
resources.
underlaid
subcell,
supports the handover between the overlaid subcell and the
Not Support:
QoS and
not supported;
underlaid
subcell.
Support: QoS
supported.
The overlaid-to-underlaid subcell handover, underlaid-to-overlaid subcell handover, bidirectional handover between overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell, and no handover
This
parameter
specifies
the
maximum
transmission
delay
the POCfor
services.
between
between
overlaid
subcell
and underlaid
subcell
areofallowed
the handover
The
POC services
have subcell
a strict and
requirement
on the
transmission
delay. The
networkthis
between
the underlaid
the overlaid
subcell
in a PS domain;
by default,
should
support
of the
POC service
type
and take
measures subcell.
to reduce the
parameter
is setthe
to detection
no handover
between
overlaid
subcell
and underlaid
transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services.
If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the Transfer Delay in the
This
specifies
of parameter.
the bandwidth for the POC services.
ABQPparameter
must be lower
thanthe
theupper
value limit
of this
The
POC services
strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network
POCpush
to talkhave
over a
cellular.
should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the
If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink
bandwidth
GbrValue
required
by the
ABQP
must
be lower for
than
the
upper
limit of the
This parameter
specifies
the lower
limit
of the
bandwidth
the
POC
services.
bandwidth
for the have
POC services.
The POC services
a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network
POCpush
to talk
cellular.
should support
theover
detection
of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the
If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink
bandwidth GbrValue required by the ABQP must be lower than the upper limit of the
This
parameter
specifies
whether to support the packet assignment, that is, the
bandwidth
for the
POC services.
assignment
of talk
the over
packet
channel to the MS through the PACCH, this only involves the
POCpush to
cellular.
takeover of the uplink immediate assignment. To improve the speed of the MS to access
the network, after the packet assignment is taken over to the BTS, the BSC reserves
This
parameter
whether
to support
the packet
immediate
uplink
resourcesspecifies
for the BTS.
The BTS
obtainsthe
thetakeover
channel of
request
information
of the MS
assignment
by the
It is relative
to the uplink
immediate
by interpreting
the BTS.
downlink
acknowledgment
message
from assignment.
the MS, and assigns the
To
improve
the speed
of the
access
the BSS
reserved
uplink
resources
to MS
the to
MS.
Then,the
thenetwork,
MS can send
the pre-allocates
data blocks. the uplink
TBF resources and sends these resources to the BTS. When the MS initiates the channel
request, the BTS uses the pre-allocated resources to send the immediate assignment
message to the MS. Upon receiving the immediate assignment message sent by the
BTS, the MS can upload the data block. Meanwhile, the BTS needs to send the additional
When
both
the MS
and theto
network
support
PFC, the QoS
are obtained
from
channel
request
message
the BSC.
Upon receiving
this parameters
request message,
the BSC
the
ABQP
the PFC. immediate assignment message to the BTS to complete the setup
sends
the in
additional
When
or the network does not support PFC, the QoS parameters are obtained
of the the
TBF MS
process.
from the DL UNITDAT of the SGSN or from the uplink request of the MS.
Gbr:guaranteed bit rate.
PFC: packet flow context.
ABQPAggregate BSS QoS Profile.
This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink.
To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set the MCS type for
transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you should dynamically adjust
the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality.
To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all
TBFs.
This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink.
To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should set this parameter to a value
among MCS1-MCS9.
To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set this parameter to
UNFIXED.
This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink.
To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, you should set the MCS type for
transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you dynamically adjust the MCS
types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality.
To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all
TBFs.
This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink.
To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should set this parameter to a value
among MCS1-MCS9.
To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, set this parameter to UNFIXED.
This parameter specifies the mode of controlling the quality of links. During the data
transmission process, the modulation scheme and coding scheme can be changed to
This
parameter
specifies
average
period environment,
of bit error detected.
dynamically
adapt
to the the
radio
transmission
thus improving the quality of
This
parameter
can
be
used
to
obtain
the
forgetting
factor, which is used for the MS to
links.
calculate
the effect
measurement results.
- Setting and
Link Adaption (LA): The network dynamically adjusts the coding scheme of a channel
based on the transmission quality of the channel link. The link quality is determined by
8PSK MEAN BEP and 8PSK CV BEP carried in the Packet EGPRS Downlink Ack/Nack
message. The network selects a proper coding scheme for transmission based on the
measurement reports from the MS. For cells with good Um interface quality, the LA
mode is usually used.
Incremental Redundancy (IR): The network should retransmit only different data blocks
This
specifies
thescheme.
retransmission
threshold
for the
CSinformation
type of the and the
with parameter
the puncturing
coding
The MS rate
buffers
the history
error
downlink
TBF
to retransmitted
change from CS4
to CS3.
data blocks
are
through
combined error correction. In the cell with bad
When
the retransmission
rate
of the
downlink
is transmission
larger than orquality,
equals but
to the
Um interface
quality, the IR
mode
can
achieveTBF
good
thevalue
MS
of
thissupport
parameter,
the CSFor
type
of the
changes
fromthe
CS4IRtomode
CS3. is usually
must
this mode.
cells
withdownlink
bad Um TBF
interface
quality,
used.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the
downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS2.
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value
of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS2.
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value
This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the downlink.
To dynamically adjust the CS type on the downlink, set the CS type for transmitting the
first TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically
adjusted based on the signal transmission quality.
If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, all TBFs use the default CS
types.
This parameter specifies the fixed CS type used on the downlink.

If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, this parameter can be set to
CS1, CS2, CS3, or CS4.
If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the downlink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink
TBF to change from CS4 to CS3.
When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of
this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3.
When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of
This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the uplink.
To dynamically adjust the CS type on the uplink, set the CS type for transmitting the
first TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically
adjusted based on the signal transmission quality.
If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, all TBFs use the default CS types.
This parameter specifies the fixed coding scheme (CS) type used on the uplink.
If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, this parameter can be set to CS1,
CS2, CS3, or CS4.
If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the uplink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED.
This parameter specifies the weight of QoS background services. The background class
service is a kind of traffic class services.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP3.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP2.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Traffic Handle Priority 1 (THP1).
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP3.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP2.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Allocation/Retention Priority 1

(ARP1).
This parameter specifies the timer set to release the Abis timeslots.
When a channel is idle, this timer is started.
When the timer expires, the Abis timeslots are released.
This parameter specifies the number of channels reserved for the CS services.
This parameter specifies the levels of dynamic channels preempted by CS services and
PS services. Only full-rate TCHs are the dynamic channels that can be preempted.
All dynamic channels can be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt
all the dynamic channels.
Control channels cannot be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all
the dynamic channels except for the control channels.
This
parameter
specifies
theservices
timer set
to release
the idle dynamic
channel
all TBFs
Dynamic
channels
carrying
cannot
be preempted:
It indicates
thatafter
the CS
on
the dynamic
services
cannot channel
preemptare
thereleased.
dynamic channels that carry services.
If all TBFs on a dynamic channel are released, the dynamic channel is not released
immediately. Instead, a timer is started when the channel is idle.
Before the timer expires, if there are new services, the dynamic channel continues to be
used and the timer is stopped.
When the timer expires, the dynamic channel is released.
This parameter specifies the policy for dynamic channel conversion in a concentric cell.
This parameter specifies the PDCH downlink multiplex threshold.

The downlink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.
This parameter specifies the PDCH uplink multiplex threshold.

The uplink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.
This parameter specifies the downlink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel

conversion.
When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10,
dynamic channels are used.
This parameter specifies the uplink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion.
When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10,
dynamic channels are used.
This parameter specifies the maximum ratio of PDCHs in a cell. The total number of
TCHs and PDCHs available in a cell is fixed. The PDCH ratio is equal to PDCHs / (TCH/Fs
+ static PDCHs). This parameter determines the proportion of PDCHs to the total
number of TCHs + PDCHs.
This parameter specifies the multi-frequency reporting value.

Value range: Reporting the frequencies of six strongest cells; Reporting the frequency of
one strongest cell; Reporting the frequencies of two strongest cells; Reporting the
frequencies of three strongest cells
This parameter specifies the threshold of HCS signal strength.
The MS uses the signal strength in the MR and this threshold to calculate C31, which is
used for cell reselection.
This parameter specifies the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) priority of a GPRS cell.
Value 0 indicates the lowest priority and value 7 indicates the highest priority.
This parameter specifies the maximum TX power level for an MS to access the packet
control channel.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level for an MS in the cell to access the
system.
This parameter specifies whether the SoLSA exclusive access cell is used. Only the MSs
customizing the Localised Service Area (LSA) service can access the exclusive cell.
This parameter specifies whether the cell can be accessed during cell reselection.
Permit Cell Access: Access is permitted.
Prohibit Cell Access: Access is prohibited.
This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in different routing areas.
When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the
target cell belong to different routing areas, the MS starts cell reselection only when the
signal level of the neighbor cells in different routing areas is higher than that of this cell,
and when the signal level difference is greater than the value of this parameter.
This parameter specifies the period when cell reselection is prohibited.
This parameter specifies whether the MS can access another cell.

Yes: The MS can access another cell.
No: The MS cannot access another cell.
This parameter specifies whether GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation
during cell reselection. Value range: 0, 1
0: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is not used for C32 calculation during cell reselection.
1: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection.
This parameter specifies whether GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis is applied to the C31
standards.
This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in the same routing area.
c31standard:
applied
When an MS in
the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the
c31notuse:
not applied
target
cell belong
to the same routing area, the C2 value measured in the overlapped
area of two adjacent cells fluctuates greatly because of the fading feature of radio
channels. Therefore, the MS frequently performs cell reselection. The frequent cell
reselection not only increases the signaling flow on the network and affects the
utilization of radio resources, but also greatly affects the data transmission rate of the
MS and decreases the QoS as a consequence.
When this parameter is used, the MS starts cell reselection only when the signal level of
the neighbor cells in the same routing area is higher than that of this cell, and when the
signal level difference is greater than the value of this parameter.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is hard to start cell reselection.
This parameter specifies whether the PSI status message is supported.

Yes: supported
No: not supported
This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to send a measurement report to

the network.
This parameter specifies the repetition period of the PS information PSI1.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PSI1 cannot be received in real time.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the PSI1 is sent frequently. This occupies
many resources.
This parameter specifies the persistence level 4 of radio priority access.
A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the
persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell.



This parameter specifies the number of timeslots for extension transmission in random
access. This parameter affects the interval for the MS to send a new Channel Request
after the channel request fails.
This parameter specifies the minimum number of timeslots between two successive
channel requests.
The MS sends an access request and waits for a response. If no response is received
after the minimum number of timeslots, the MS resends the access request.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority
4.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request
message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the
lowest priority.
lowest priority.
lowest priority.
lowest priority.
This parameter specifies the access control class.

This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. The value of this parameter
ranges from 1 to 12.
Value 1 indicates one PRACH.
Value 2 indicates two PRACHs.
...
Value
12 indicates
12 PRACHs.
This parameter
specifies
the number of PAGCH blocks. The value of this parameter
ranges from 1 to 12.
Value 1 indicates one PAGCH.
Value 2 indicates two PAGCHs.
...
Valueparameter
12 indicates
four PBCCHs.
This
specifies
the number of PBCCH blocks. The value of this parameter
ranges from 1 to 4.
Value 1 indicates one PBCCH.
Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs.
Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs.
Value 4 indicates four PBCCHs.
This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet
transfer mode.
This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet
idle mode.
This parameter specifies the minimum duration when the MS stays in non-DRX mode
after the NC NC-measurement report is sent.
The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time after the measurement report
is sent.
This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. A higher value
indicates a higher access priority.
This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. The timer is sent
through the system message broadcast in each cell.
When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS, the negative
offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires.
This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS.
Therefore, the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the
BCCH is shorter than the penalty time.
Value infinity indicates an infinity offset.
This parameter specifies the type
of the
extension
measurement
report
interval
between
two extension
measurement
reports.
Three types of the extension measurement report are type 1, type 2, and type 3.
Type 1: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the
network regardless of whether the BSIC was decoded. The measurement report should
contain the received signal level and BSIC.
Type 2: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the
network. For the six carriers, the BSIC must be decoded successfully and the NCC
specified by NCC_PERMITTED is carried. The measurement report should contain the
received signal level and BSIC.
Type 3: The MS does not need to decode the BSIC of the carriers that send the
measurement
Thethe
measurement
report
contain the
received signal
level3
This
parameterreport.
specifies
frequency index
ofshould
the interference
measurement
in type
and
interference
measurement report.
of a carrier.
of the
extension measurement
This parameter specifies the NCC bitmap of the measurement report sent by the MS.
The MS reports only the NCC bitmap of the BSIC and the carrier measurement report
that matches the bitmap.
The network can require the MS to send measurement reports. When the MS is in idle
mode, it sends the extension measurement reports. This parameter can be set to em0
or em1.
This parameter specifies whether the CS paging on the A interface is supported.
Yes: The MS can receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service.
No: The MS cannot receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS
service.
This parameter specifies whether the 11-bit EGPRS access is supported.
Yes: supported
No: not supported
This parameter specifies the priority of packet access of MSs to a cell. The 2bit Radio
This
parameter
thethe
routing
color code
of a GPRS
cell.message has four
Priority
messagespecifies
carried by
MS inarea
the Packet
Channel
Request
levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. When
an MS accesses the network, the BSC compares the Radio Priority in the Channel
Request message with the parameter setting in the cell. The BSC requests for
establishing the TBF for a channel only when the radio priority reaches the access
priority of the cell.
The values of this parameter area as follows:
No packet access
This
parameter
Packet
access ofspecifies
level 1 whether the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the
CCCH
the cell.
Packetofaccess
of levels 1-2
SPLIT_PG_CYCLE
used1-3
to set the DRX period. For the BTS and MS supporting the
Packet access of is
levels
SPLIT_PG_CYCLE-based
paging groups on the CCCH, this parameter is optional.
Packet access of levels 1-4
Yes:
parameter
transmitted
on the CCCH
of the
In theThe
cellSPLIT_PG_CYCLE
reselection required
by theisnetwork,
the network
requests
thecell.
MS to send
No: The SPLIT_PG_CYCLE
parameter
is not
transmitted
on the
of the cell.
measurement
reports to control
its cell
reselection.
There
are CCCH
three network
control
modes.
nc0: Normal MS control. The MS performs automatic cell reselection.
nc1: MS control with measurement reports. The MS sends measurement reports to the
network and performs automatic cell reselection.
nc2: Network control. The MS sends measurement reports to the network but does not
perform automatic cell reselection.
This parameter specifies the value of PAN_MAX. It is also the maximum value of N3102.
Value 4 indicates that PAN_MAX is 4; value 32 indicates that PAN_MAX is 32; value No
use indicates that this parameter is not used.
This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When the MS receives a Packet
Downlink Ack/Nack message from the network for increasing the value of V(S) or V(A),
the MS increases N3102 by PAN_INC.
Value 0 indicates that PAN_INC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_INC is 7; value No use
indicates that this parameter is not used.
This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When T3182 expires, the MS
decreases N3102 by PAN_DEC.
Value 0 indicates that PAN_DEC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_DEC is 7; value No use
This
parameter
specifies
the maximum
countdown value of the MS.
indicates
that this
parameter
is not used.
This parameter determines BS_CV_MAX and is used for the MS to calculate the CV. The
parameter also determines the duration of the T3198 timer.
Every time the MS sends an uplink RLC data block, the receive state of the data block is
set to Pending and the T3198 is started. If the MS receives a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack
message before T3198 expires, it updates the receive state of each uplink RLC data
block based on the acknowledgment bitmap contained in the message. If T3198 for the
RLC
block in
the Pending
state expires, the
MS setstype
the receive
of this data
This data
parameter
specifies
the acknowledgment
message
used bystate
the MS.
block
Nack pulses
and retransmits
block.
If fourto
access
are used, the
the data
timing
advance can be obtained without a polling
message.
If the RLC/MAC control block is used, the timing advance can be obtained only by
sending a polling message. Four access pulses are recommended.
This parameter specifies the access burst type used by the MS on the PRACH and
PTCCH/U. The access burst type is carried in the packet control acknowledgment
message.
This parameter specifies the maximum duration of the non-DRX mode. DRX
8bit:
access using
the 8-bitisburst
(discontinuous
reception)
a parameter carried by the cell broadcast message.
11bit:
The MSaccess
stays using
in the the
DRX11-bit
modeburst
for a certain period when changing from the packet
SI13
indicates
access
burst
transfer
mode the
to the
packet
idletype.
mode. After the TBF is released, the MS monitors all the
CCCH blocks during the non-DRX mode period and the BSC6000 reserves the MS
context.
The reservation
depends
on the
the MS
smaller
value
between
DRX_Timer_Max
This parameter
specifies time
the timer
set for
to wait
for the
TBF release
after
and NON_DRX_TIMER.
is negotiated with the SGSN during the GPRS
receiving
the last data NON_DRX_TIMER
block.
attachment
ofreceives
the MS and
is usually
Therefore,
reservation
timeand
When the MS
the its
lastvalue
RLC data
blockhigh.
carrying
the lastthe
block
flag (FBI=1)
actually
on RLC
DRX_TIMER_MAX.
confirmsdepends
that all the
data blocks on the TBF are received, the MS sends the Packet
Value
0 indicates
that
the MScarrying
enters the
immediately. flag (FAI=1) and starts
Downlink
Ack/Nack
message
theDRX
finalmode
acknowledgement
Value
1
indicates
that
the
MS
enters
the
DRX
mode
one second later. Value n indicates
T3192 at the same time.
that
the MS
enters
the
DRX
mode the
n seconds
later. and monitors paging channels.
If
T3192
expires,
the
MS
releases
TBF
resources
This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink
During
the TBF
release process, if the MS is in half-duplex mode and receives the Packet
Assignment
message.
Uplink
Assignment
message,
the MS responds
This
parameter
specifies
the maximum
intervalimmediately.
set for the MS to wait for the Packet
If
the MS
does not receive
theAfter
Packet
Assignment
message
during
the TBF
Uplink
Assignment
message.
theUplink
MS sends
the Packet
Resource
Request
or Packet
release
process,
themessage
MS enters
the packet
idle mode.
If the
MS is in dual
transfer
mode,
Downlink
Ack/Nack
carrying
Channel
Request
Description,
T3168
is started
to
it enters
thePacket
dedicated
mode.
wait
for the
Uplink
Assignment message from the network.
If
the MS
thechannel
Packet Uplink
Assignment
message
before
T3168 expires,
T3168
Based
on receives
the paging
used by
the system,
the network
operation
modes are
is
reset. Otherwise,
the Operation
MS initiates
the I,
PSNetwork
access procedure
fourNetwork
times. If the
classified
into Network
Mode
Operation again
Mode for
II, and
Packet
Uplink
Assignment
message is still not received, the MS regards that this uplink
Operation
Mode
III.
TBF
establishment
has
failed.
When the GS interface is configured, Network Operation Mode I is used.
When the Gs interface or the PCCCH is not configured, Network Operation Mode II is
used.
When the Gs interface is not configured but the PCCCH is configured, Network Operation
Mode III is used.
Configuration Policy
The network has four layers, numbered 1-4 respectively. If

the number of the layer is small, the priority of the layer is
high.
This parameter and Cell Priority determine the priority of a
cell.
The priority affects the sequencing of neighbor cells for
None
None
This parameter should be set as required.
1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end

and the receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact
position of the other bits in the same burst and to
determine whether the received co-channel signals are
useful signals. If a burst is incon
Each layer has 16 priorities, numbered 1-16 respectively. If
the number of the priority is small, the priority is high. This
parameter along with Layer of the Cell determines the
priority of a cell. The priority affects the sequencing of
neighbor cells fo
None
None
None
None
None
None
Yes: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the
MS is in the packet transmission mode, the network informs
the MS of the system information about neighbor cells in
advance.
No: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the
MS is in the packet
None
None
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports the

information about all neighbor cells to the PCU when there
are more than 32 neighbor cells. If this parameter is set to
No, the BSC reports the information about a maximum of 32
neighbor cells to the PC
None
None
None
None
None
None
None

transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no
voice transfer. This function has the following benefits:
1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the
MS and reducing system int
The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If
this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover
success rate may be affected.
None
None
None
As specified in Huawei concentric cell technology, a

concentric cell is divided into an OL subcell and a UL
subcell. The TRXs of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell
can use different frequency reuse modes.
The concentric cell technology can be combined
None
When the BCCH is configured in the OL subcell, it is not

configured in the UL subcell.
The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power
transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function
has the following benefits:
1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the
MS and reducing system interference
2.
On
the downlink
The
average
call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment
is allowed.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level
of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to
camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and
the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the
parameter based
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and
boards in this BTS will be activated.
Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells,
TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be deactivated.
When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be
set
to Not Activated
if the
Active
State of the
upper-level
Generally,
the timeslots
are
automatically
calculated
and
BTS is set The
to Not
Activated.
assigned.
timeslots,
however, can be also manually
assigned to meet the requirement of operators. The
manually assigned OML timeslot cannot be adjusted when
the timeslot is arranged.
The manually assigned OML timeslots can only be modified
manually.
This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.
None
This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied

subrack.
None
This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied

E1 port.
If all semi-permanent links are configured on one interface
board, the In-BSC Port No. and the Out-BSC Port No. must
be set to different E1 ports on the interface board.
This parameter is to be viewed only.
None
None
None
The BTS2X supports frame FH and RF FH. The BTS3X of all
versions supports the cross-cabinet baseband FH and RF
FH, including the timeslot FH and frame FH. The doubleAdjust
the cell
coverage
by configuring
theRF
Power
transceiver
BTSs
supportarea
the baseband
FH and
FH,
Level;
however,
when FH
theand
antenna
over
high
covers
including
the timeslot
frameisFH,
but
do and
not support
too
cells, you
should lower
the many
cross-cabinet
baseband
FH. the antenna and increase
the tilt of the antenna first. When the transmit power of a
BTS reduces, the indoor coverage becomes worse.
Generally, for cells of the same priority in a network, the
power level configuration should ensure that the EIRPs of
the cells are basically the same.
When configuring the power level, you should note that
different TRXs in a cell can have different losses due to
different
combination modes.
None
None
The smaller this parameter is, the higher the TRX priority is.
In other similar conditions, channels are allocated to the
TRX with higher priority.
None
None
This parameter takes effect only for the EDGE-enabled TRX.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a too great or too small value, the

cabinet top output power of the BTS is different from the
TRX output power, resulting in the failure of channel
allocation.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
There are two types of slot number: logical slot number and
physical slot number. When configuring RSL links, set this
parameter to the logical slot number of the GXPUM.
This parameter need not be set when the Work Mode is set
to Auto.
You must set this parameter when the Work Mode is set to
Manual.
When the Work Mode is set to Free-run, this parameter is 0.
None
None
None
None
transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no
voice
transfer.
This
function correlates
has the following
benefits:
The value
of this
parameter
with Cell
ExtType. If
1.
On
the uplink:
power
consumption
of the
this
parameter
is decreasing
set to a toothe
small
value,
the handover
MS
and reducing
interference
success
rate maysystem
be affected.
2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the
BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing
intermodulation inside the BTS
3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency
interference is reduced and the network quality is improved.
The DL DTX function is also restricted by the MSC.To enable
this function, the DTX function must be enabled on the MSC
side.
If downlink DTX is disabled on the MSC side, downlink DTX
None be used irrespective of the setting of this parameter.
cannot
If downlink DTX is enabled on the MSC side, the setting of
this parameter determines whether downlink DTX is used in
a cell.
None
None
None
None
If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level
of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to
camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and
the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the
parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink
and downlink levels.
The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment

is allowed.
coverage,
this parameter
be settotostop
No.power
The DTX function
allows ashould
transmitter
lasts
longtransfer.
time, and
therefore
the
transmission
in the case
of for
no a
voice
This
function
subscriber
cannot
wait
and
hooks
on.
It
is
recommended
has the following benefits:
that
be set tothe
Yes.power consumption of the
1. Onthis
theparameter
uplink: decreasing
MS and reducing system interference

2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the
BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing
intermodulation inside the BTS
3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency
interference is reduced and the network quality is improved.
None
None
None
None
None
None
When the total power of the carrier on the single QTRU
board exceeds the maximum permissible output power, the
power sharing algorithm needs to be enabled. If the data
configuration detects that the power sharing must be used,
but the corresponding downlink power control of a cell is
disabled. The power must be adjusted or the downlink
power control must be enabled.
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the half-rate
channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel
seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. Insufficient
half-rate channels can be assigned to the MS. Thus, the
capacity of the BSC is reduced.
If this
this parameter
parameter is
is set
set to
to a
a higher
lower value,
If
value,the
thehalf-rate
half-rate
channels
channels are
are assigned
assigned to
to the
the MS
MS only
only when
when the
the channel
channel
seizure
calls use the
seizure ratio
ratio of
of overlaid
overlaid subcell
subcell is
is very
very low.
high.The
Insufficient
half-rate
channel
even
if
there
are
enough
full-rate
half-rate channels can be assigned to the MS. Thus, the
channels,
influences
the speech quality.
capacity ofwhich
the BSC
is reduced.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the half-rate
channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel
seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very low. The calls use the
half-rate channel even if there are enough full-rate
channels, which influences the speech quality.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the burst influence

may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may
not be in time. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the
judgment is imprecise.
This parameter should be set to a small value because the

SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure
duration for the MS.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of
accidental factors may be reduced but the judgment of
channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set
to a lower value, the judgment is imprecise.
This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels
caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover
decisions. When this parameter is set to a higher value, the
impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system
response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is
degraded.
If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference
indication message will not be reported even though the
interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value,
the interference indication message will be reported even
though no interference exists.
None
None
None
None
None
It is recommended not to use the TIGHT BCCH algorithm in

multiband network.
None
None
Huawei recommends that the parameter Enhanced TCH

Adjust Allowed be set to No, the forced handover may fail in
the concentric cell. In a normal cell, Huawei recommends
that this parameter be set to Yes to ensure that the timeslot
If
this parameter
too small,initthe
cannot
arrangement
can is
beset
performed
cell. correctly indicate
the idle state of the current SDCCHs and consequently the
rollback of SDCCHs immediately triggers adjustment and
affects the network performance.
If this parameter is set too large, the channel allocation
algorithm becomes less sensitive and consequently the
SDCCHs stay in idle state and cannot be rolled back for a
long
of time.
If thisperiod
parameter
is set too small, the SDCCHs in the cell
may be insufficient and the dynamic adjustment cannot be
initiated, thus affecting the access of users. It is
meaningless to set the parameter too large.
If this parameter is set too large and consequently there is a

small number of requests for SDCCHs, the SDCCHs of a cell
are in idle state;
If this parameter is set too small and consequently there is
a large number of requests for SDCCHs, the requests
cannot meet the requirements.
The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates.
Therefore, the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3.
The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR
ACS (F/H).
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the
ACS. The five bits represent the coding rates from 7.40
kbit/s to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the
coding
None rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the
coding rate is not contained in the ACS. One to four coding
rates can be selected simultaneously.
If only one coding rate is specified by this parameter, then
the parameter AMR Starting Mode (H) must be set to 0,
which means the lowest coding rate. All AMR coding rate
None
adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate adjustment
hystereses (H) are meaningless.
If two coding rates are specified by this parameter, then
AMR Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0 or 1. The parameters
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (H), AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.hyst1 (H), AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H), and AMR DL
Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H) are meaningful. Other AMR
coding rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate
adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningless.
The
AMRcoding
ACS (F/H)
contains
at most
rates.then
If three
rates
are specified
byfour
thiscoding
parameter,
Therefore,
theMode
value(H)
of can
this be
parameter
AMR Starting
set to 0,ranges
1, or 2.from
The 0 to 3.
The
values 0AMR
to 3 UL
match
those
of adj.th1
the coding
of AMR
parameters
Coding
Rate
(H),rates
AMR UL
Coding
ACS
Rate(F/H).
adj.hyst1 (H), AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H), and
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H) are meaningful. Other
AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding
rate adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningless.
None
If four coding rates are specified by this parameter, then
AMR Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3. All the
AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding
rate adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningful.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the
ACS. The eight bits represent the coding rates from 12.2
kbit/s
None to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the
coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the
coding rate is not contained in the ACS. One to four coding
rates can be selected simultaneously.
If only one coding full rate is specified by this parameter,
then AMR Starting Mode (F) must be set to 0. All the AMR
None
coding rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are
meaningless.
If two coding rates are specified by this parameter, then
AMR Starting Mode (F) can be set to 0 or 1. The parameters
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (F), AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.hyst1 (F), AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F), and AMR DL
Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F) are meaningful. Other AMR coding
rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are meaningless.
If three coding rates are specified by this parameter, then
AMR
Mode
(F) can
set value,
to 0, 1,the
or call
2. The
If thisStarting
parameter
is set
to a be
great
completion
parameters
AMR
UL
Coding
Rate
adj.th1
(F),
AMR ULisCoding
rate of MSs is increased and the QoS of the network
Rate
adj.hyst1
AMR DLincreases
Coding Rate
adj.th1(F),
improved.
This,(F),
however,
the load
of the and
BSC.AMR
DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F) are meaningful. Other AMR
coding rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are
To
improve the success rate of reassignment, it is
meaningless.
recommended
that the
value
Different
Band be
If four coding rates
are default
specified
by this
parameter,
then
used.
That is, Mode
the frequency
band
of 0,
the1,preferentially
AMR Starting
(F) can be
set to
2, or 3. All the
reassigned
is different
from what
is used
in theare
AMR codingchannel
rate adjustment
thresholds
and
hysteresis
original
assignment.
meaningful.
Pay special attention to the setting of this parameter during
an upgrade. If receiving short messages is allowed, this
parameter must be set to No.
If this parameter is set to Yes, MSs cannot receive short
messages.
In satellite transmission mode, this function can be enabled
to reduce the impact of the delay in satellite transmission
on the signaling processing rate. For terrestrial
transmission, the default value of this parameter is No.
None
The eMLPP supports a maximum of seven priorities (A, B,

and 0-4). The two highest priorities are reserved only for
local use in the network. Priorities 0-4 are used for
subscribers all over the world.
If the eMLPP function needs to be fully implemented, the
If
this parameter
is set
to MS
Yes,(including
the BSC initiates
a resupport
of the MSC,
HLR,
SIM) is required.
assignment when receiving an assignment failure message
from the Um interface. This helps to improve the call
completion rate and the QoS of the network. If there are a
large number of assignment failure messages, the BSC
initiates many re-assignment procedures and thus the BSC
load increases.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Ec/No means Signal Noise Ratio in WCDMA. It maps with C/I

in GSM.
RSCP, Received Signal Code Power
None
None
None
Serving Band Reporting is valid if Report Type is set to EMR.
None
None
position is still available, the MS reports the measurement

results of other neighboring cells regardless of the bands at
which the neighboring cells are located.
If this parameter is set to 2, the MS reports the
measurement results of two neighbor cell known and
permitted by the NCC at each band with the best signal (the
band serving the current cell not included). The MS reports
the measurement result of the neighbor cell at the band
serving the current cell in the redundant position. If the
redundant position is still available, the MS reports the
measurement results of other neighbor cells regardless of
For
900/1800
MHzthe
CoBCCH
cell,cells
it is are
recommended
that
the a
bands
at which
neighbor
located.
this
parameter
beis
set
toto
Yes.
If this
parameter
set
3, the MS reports the
For
a 1800 MHz
cell inof
the
dual-band
network,
it is and
measurement
results
three
neighbor
cells known
recommended
that
this
setthe
to Yes.
permitted by the
NCC
atparameter
each bandbe
with
best signal (the
If theserving
A5/4-7 the
encryption
is used, itThe
is MS reports
band
current algorithm
cell not included).
recommended
thatresult
this parameter
be setcell
to Yes.
the measurement
of the neighbor
at the band
If
this parameter
is set
small
value, radio
linksIfare
serving
the current
cellto
in athe
redundant
position.
thelikely
to
be faultyposition
and therefore
call drops the
occur.
redundant
is still available,
MS reports the
If
this parameter
is setoftoother
a great
value, cells
a long
time lastsof
measurement
results
neighbor
regardless
before
an MS
disconnects
a call, and
resource
the bands
at which
the neighbor
cellstherefore
are located.
usage
low.
Thisvolumes
parameter
takes effect
on are
the the
downlink.
When is
the
traffic
of multiple
bands
same
and there is no special requirement on the band, the MBR
(Multi Band Report) is set to 0. When the traffic volumes of
multiple
bands are different and the MS is expected to enter
None
a band preferentially, the MBR (Multi Band Report) is set to
3. In other cases except the first two cases, the MBR (Multi
Band Report) is set to 1 or 2. For details, see GSM Rec.
This
parameter can be used to control network load based
05.08.
on the MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from
accessing the network. It is recommended that this
parameter be not used.
This parameter can be used to control network load based
on the MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from
accessing the network. It is recommended that this
parameter be not used.
This parameter should be set as required: In the areas
where the traffic volume is low, this parameter can be set to
4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access. In the cells
where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the
traffic volume is high, it is recommended this parameter be
set to 1.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through
rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the function is
not obvious.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through
rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the function is
not obvious.
If the parameter is set to Yes, the immediate assignment
retransmission parameter is sent. If the parameter is set to
No, the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is
not sent.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the put-through rate of MS
can be increased but the BSC load may increase.
None
None
None
None
None
None
Only the BTS3X in G3BTS32.30000.04.1130 or later and the
double-transceiver BTSs support the LAPDm N200
parameter.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC sends the LAPDm
N200 parameter. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC
does not send the LAPDm N200 parameter.
IfIftimer
setsupport
to a toothis
small
value, the
transmit
end
a BTST200
doesisnot
parameter,
the
parameter
may
mistakenly
that the the
linkBTS
is faulty
andbethe data
should
be set to regard
No. Otherwise,
cannot
transmission
fails before the transmit end receives a
initialized.
response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too
small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced
and
the T200
success
rate
transmission
is reduced.If
T200
and
If timer
is set
toof
a too
small value,
the transmit
end
N200mistakenly
are set to too
great
values,
theischannels
are
seized
may
regard
that
the link
faulty and
the
data all
along
when the
link
is faulty.
Thus, resources
are wasted.
transmission
fails
before
the transmit
end receives
a
and
the T200
success
rate
transmission
is reduced.If
T200
and
If timer
is set
toof
a too
small value,
the transmit
end
N200
are set to too
great
values,
theischannels
are
seized
may mistakenly
regard
that
the link
faulty and
the
data all
along
when the
link
is faulty.
Thus, resources
are wasted.
transmission
fails
before
the transmit
end receives
a
and
the T200
success
rate
transmission
is reduced.If
T200
and
If timer
is set
toof
a too
small value,
the transmit
end
N200mistakenly
are set to too
great
values,
theischannels
are
seized
may
regard
that
the link
faulty and
the
data all
along
when the
link
is faulty.
Thus, resources
are wasted.
transmission
fails
before
the transmit
end receives
a
and
the T200
success
rate
transmission
is reduced.If
T200
and
If timer
is set
toof
a too
small value,
the transmit
end
N200
are set to too
great
values,
theischannels
are
seized
may mistakenly
regard
that
the link
faulty and
the
data all
along
when the
link
is faulty.
Thus, resources
are wasted.
transmission
fails
before
the transmit
end receives
a
and
the T200
success
rate
transmission
is reduced.If
T200
and
If timer
is set
toof
a too
small value,
the transmit
end
N200
are set to too
great
values,
theischannels
are
seized
may mistakenly
regard
that
the link
faulty and
the
data all
along
when the
link
is faulty.
Thus, resources
are wasted.
transmission
fails
before
the transmit
end receives
a
If
timer
is set
toof
a too
small value,
the transmit
end
and
the T200
success
rate
transmission
is reduced.If
T200
and
may
regard
that
the link
faulty and
the
data all
N200mistakenly
are set to too
great
values,
theischannels
are
seized
transmission
fails
before
the transmit
end receives
a
along when the
link
is faulty.
Thus, resources
are wasted.
and the success rate of transmission is decreased. If T200
and N200 are set to too great values, the channels are
seized all along when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are
Generally, this parameter is set to 1. It is set according to
wasted.
the actual BTS receiver sensitivity and the minimum MS
access level. RACH Busy Threshold must be greater than
RACH Min.Access Level.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the allowable
error for the random access signal is high and an MS can
easily access the network. But the error report rate is high.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the error report
rate of the MS is low but the MS cannot easily access the
network.
function.
BCCH aiding: The main BCCH is aided to another normal
TRX in this cell.
BCCH aiding switchback: BCCH aiding switchback functions
after the originally configured BCCH TRX is recovered.
Baseband FH aiding: When the TRX involved in baseband
FH in the cell is faulty or BCCH aiding is performed in the
cell, baseband FH aiding occurs and the cell is initialized as
a non-hopping cell.
Baseband FH aiding switchback: When all the TRXs involved
in baseband hopping in the cell are recovered and the
originally configured BCCH TRX is normal, baseband FH
aiding switchback can be performed and the cell is restored
to the baseband FH mode.
None
After TRX aiding (BCCH aiding or baseband FH aiding) or
switchback occurs, the cell is re-initialized.
All
BTSs has
will strong
not perform
the aiding function
within
Thetypes
AMR of
coding
anti-interference
capabilities.
15 minutes
afterframe
the default
cellrate
is initialized
Under
the same
erasure
(FER), the(you
AMRcan
coding
configureathe
in this
period). with non-AMR coding. If
supports
lowBTSs
C/I ratio
compared
the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is
improved. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH
period
(480ms))
AMR
coding
mode can be a
little more
The AMR
coding in
has
strong
anti-interference
capabilities.
than
that
in
non-AMR
coding
mode.
Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding
supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If
improved. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH
period
(480ms))
AMR
coding
mode can be a
little more
The AMR
coding in
has
strong
anti-interference
capabilities.
than
non-AMR
mode.
Underthat
thein
same
framecoding
erasure
rate (FER), the AMR coding
improved. The value of AHR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH
period
(480ms))
AMR
coding
mode can be a
little more
The AMR
coding in
has
strong
anti-interference
capabilities.
than
that
in
non-AMR
coding
mode.
Under the same frame erasion rate (FER), the AMR coding
improved. The value of AFR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH
period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more
than
in of
non-AMR
coding mode.
If thethat
value
the parameter
is too high, the cells with
heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that

the handover does not make sense. If the value of the
parameter is too low, it is difficult to select candidate target
cells.
For the BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24), this parameter
must be set according to the actual receiver sensitivity of
the
BTS and the minimum access level of the MS to ensure
None
the balance between the uplink and the downlink. This
parameter also affects handover access of RACH BURST
during asynchronous handover.
For the BTS3X series and double-transceiver BTSs, this
Properly
setting
parameter
can increase
the paging
parameter
does this
not affect
MS access
but affects
the
success
rate.
If
this
parameter
is
set
to
a
too
great by
value,
reporting of CCCH_LOAD_IND. If the level received
the
congestion
may
occur.side is greater than the RACH Busy
BCCH on the
network
Threshold, the CCCH_LOAD_IND is counted once whether
the decoding is successful. The RACH whose level is lower
than the RACH Busy Threshold and whose decoding is
successful is also counted. The measurement period is the
Average RACH Load Timeslot Number.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS easily
considers that the RACH timeslot is busy and reports
overload messages to the BSC. If the value is too great, the
If
thecannot
value of
this parameter
does
the value
BTS
determine
the status
ofnot
thematch
RACH with
timeslot
The
physical
sent is
over
the FACCH. Four TDMA
supported
byinformation
the BTS, anisalarm
generated.
correctly.
frames
sentifeach
time at theisinterval
18 ms. If the
For the are
BTS24,
this parameter
used toofdetermine
busy
value
of T3105
is smaller
than orwith
equal
to 18
ms,BTS30.
the BTS
timeslot,
its setting
is consistent
that
in the
If
needs
to retransmit
physical
information
the MS
this parameter
is thethe
level
threshold
for valid to
random
when
the
T3105
expires for
thethat
firstintime.If
the
access,
itstimer
setting
is consistent
with
the BTS20.
transmission
of the
the BTS312,
physical BTS3001C,
informationBTS3001C+,
over the FACCH is
The settings of
not
complete,
expiration is invalid
time is
BTS3002C,
andthe
double-transceiver
BTSbecause
must bethe
consistent
shorter
than
an
FACCH
period.Considering
the
previous
with
the
meaning
and
requirement
of
the
BTS30.
The value of this parameter can be increased when
factors,
20becomes
ms is theslow
reasonable
minimumsuccess
value for
this
handover
or the handover
rate
parameter.
At present,
the default
value
of this parameter is
decreases because
of clock
problems
or poor
70
ms.
transmission.An
MS can be handed over only when Max
Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout
is greater than the interval between EST IND and HO
DETECT (120-180 ms). Otherwise, the handover fails.
This parameter can be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is

applied.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more

difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter, the more difficult

for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier
During
a handover
this
is set to
for the BSC
to handdecision,
over the ifMS
to parameter
a TDD 3G cell.
Preference for 2G Cell, the BSC first selects the target
handover cell from the 2G candidate cells; If this parameter
is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the BSC first selects the
target handover cell from the 3G candidate cells; If this
parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold, and
if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G
candidate cells is lower than or equal to HO Preference
Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred.
None
If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is likely to

be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to
ping-pong handovers.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is
unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell.
If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is likely to
ping-pong handovers.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is
unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell.
This parameter can only be applied to the fast-moving
handover.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered

value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is
inaccurate.
inaccurate.

difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered.

difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered.
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load

in the UL subcell is increased.
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow

load is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow

load is increased.
None
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow

load is increased.
None
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow

load is increased.

difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL
subcell can be triggered.

difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL
subcell can be triggered.
If this parameter is set to a too great or too low value, load

balancing between the OL subcell and UL subcell is
adversely affected.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load
in the OL subcell is increased.
None
None

This parameter must be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is

applied.




The greater the value of this parameter is, the more difficult
During
the handover
decision:
for the BSC
to hand over
the MS to a 2G cell and the easier
If
is set
tothe
Preference
2G3G
Cell,
the BSC
forthis
theparameter
BSC to hand
over
MS to anfor
FDD
cell.
first selects the target handover cell from the 2G candidate
cells.
If this parameter is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the BSC
first selects the target handover cell from the 3G candidate
cells.
If this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By
Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell
among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to HO
Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is
None
preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred.
None
None
None

in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share
the traffic.

in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share
the traffic.
This parameter must be set to a value that is greater than

or equal to the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold.


When the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail is set to 0, no
penalty related to retry times after UtoO handover failure is
imposed. That is, the call can still be handed over to the
previous target cell after the penalty time.
None
None
This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric

Allowed parameter is set to Yes.


None
This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell.
This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell.

For the network with a single frequency band, inter-BSC
handovers are triggered at the edge of two adjacent cells.
Therefore, the recommended value of this parameter is
Underlaid Subcell. For a dual-band network (for example,
900/1800 MHz cells), incoming BSC handovers occur
frequently and are generally not triggered at the edges of
adjacent cells. In this case, the recommended value of this
parameter is Overlaid Subcell. In the case that success rate
of handovers drops, UL Subcell is preferred for incoming
BSC handovers.
None
None
None
When TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. is set to 0, the TCH

in the OL subcell cannot be assigned preferentially to the
MS because no TA is lower than this threshold. In this case,
Assign Optimum Layer is set to Underlaid Subcell.
None
None

difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered.

difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered.
Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced

concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the
UL subcell is determined by different factors.
#N/A
None



None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the

candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level
based on the K principle. This parameter affects the ranking
of candidate cells. Generally, it is set to 0.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, call drop may

easily occur.
Penalty can be performed on only the cell that is not located

at the fourth layer.
None
This parameter, together with Forbidden time after MAX

Times, determines the frequency of intra-cell handovers.
This parameter to used to disable the intra-cell handover for

a certain period.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the intra-cell

handover may not be timely; if this parameter is set to a too
great value, the system resources may be wasted when
intra-cell handovers occur frequently.
When the cell radius is fixed, the smaller the value of this
parameter is (the required velocity is higher), the more the
difficult fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be
triggered.
The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult
the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be
triggered.
The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult
the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be
triggered.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system
traffic volume cannot be reduced effectively; if this
parameter is set to a too small value, the judgment on
whether the MS fast passes a cell may be incorrect.
The setting of this parameter affects the width of the
handover strip during load handover.
The setting of this parameter affects the load handover

time. If it is set to a too greater value, the handover time of
each level is long.
The setting of this parameter determines the maximum

width of the handover strip during load handover.
The setting of this parameter affects the load handover

targeted to the cell. If it is set to a lower value, the number
of handover requests that are rejected increases.
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of the

load handover. If it is set to a lower value, the number of
load handovers increases.
The value of this parameter should not be set too high. Load
handover is allowed only when the system flow is lower
than the setting of this parameter. Otherwise, the load on
the system is increased.
handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value,
the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.

handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value,
the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.


For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn,

is used in interference handover decision. An uplink
interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is
set to a small value.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink
set to a too small value.











If the number of consecutive measurement reports without

the downlink measurement report is greater than the value
of this parameter, the handover decision related to no
downlink measurement report is not performed. Therefore,
if this parameter is set to a lower value, the no downlink
measurement report handover cannot be triggered.
The handover decision is allowed only when the uplink
receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this
parameter. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a higher
value, the no downlink measurement report handover
cannot be triggered.
This parameter is set according to the traffic volume.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level

drop is required for triggering a rapid level drop handover.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following

requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 =
80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in
which the receive level drops rapidly.

This parameter determines the cell coverage for the TA
emergency
handover.isInset
thetoareas
small
space
When this parameter
0 andwith
if the
measurement
between
BTSs and
densely
BTSs,
the coverage
report indicates
that
DTX is distributed
not used, the
FULLSET
values
of
the cell
can be reduced
if this
parameter
a lower
should
be selected.
When this
parameter
is is
setset
to to
0 and
if
value.
the measurement report indicates that DTX is used, the
SUBSET values should be selected. In latter cases, the

SUBSET values should be used irrespective of how DTX is
indicated in the subsequent measurement reports.
When this parameter is set to 1, whether the FULLSET
values or the SUBSET values should be selected depends on
the
DTX
indication
measurement
Thatcell
is, if
If this
parameter
is bit
setintothe
a too
great value,report.
the target
the
measurement
report indicates
that
DTX is for
used,
for the
previous handover
will not be
selected
thethe
next
SUBSET
values
should
be selected;
the FULLSET
handover,
but the
probability
of callotherwise,
drop increases.
If this
values
should
be
selected.
parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of
handover failure increases.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell

for the previous handover will not be selected for the next
handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell
for the previous handover will not be selected for the next
handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this
inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be
modified.
The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the
penalty time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail is. In other words,
triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult.
modified.
modified.

modified.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to
ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher
value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original
serving cell.
serving cell.
serving cell.
This
parameter
the
on a
value,
the MS is specifies
unlikely to
bepenalty
handedlevel
overimposed
to the original
target
servingcell.
cell.A penalty level is imposed on a target cell to
avoid further attempts when a handover fails due to any of
the following reasons: cell congestion, a message indicating
internal handover refusal is received, a message indicating
Um interface handover failure is received during out-going
BSC handover, or a message indicating Um interface
handover failure is received during internal handover. This
parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell
When
this
parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of
penalty
time.
sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is
delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded.
When this parameter is set to an excessive value, the
degraded.

When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of

sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is
delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded.
This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels
caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover
decisions. When this parameter is set to a higher value, the
degraded.
Measurement reports fail to be decoded correctly when the

signal strength in the serving cell is poor. When the number
of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of
this parameter, all previous measurement reports are
discarded and the handover may fail. Therefore, Huawei
recommends that this parameter be set to a great value for
emergency handovers.
If the receive level of an adjacent cell is greater than or
equal to the value of this parameter, this adjacent cell can
be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry.
This parameter should be set on the basis of the data rate
and flow on the Abis interface. If the preprocessed MR is
sent at a high frequency, the flow on the Abis interface is
increased.
When MR preprocessing is enabled, the UL and DL balance
measurement is affected if Transfer BS/MS Power Class is
set to No. In addition, the handovers (such as PBGT
handovers, load handovers, and concentric cell handovers)
that require power compensation may fail.
In 4:1 multiplexing mode, if there are more than two
timeslots
this
When thisconfigured
parameterin
is SDCCH/8
set to NO,scheme,
the BSCthen
preprocesses
the
parameter
should
be set
No.
measurement
reports.
In to
this
case, the Transfer Original
MR, Transfer BS/MS Power Class, and Sent Freq.of
preprocessed MR parameters are invalid.
When this parameter is set to YES, the signaling on the Abis
interface and the load of the BSC are reduced. Thus, the
response time is shortened and the network performance is
improved.
When setting this parameter, you should determine
whether
the BTS supports
the configured
power
control
If
this parameter
is set to Yes,
the MS does
not use
the
algorithms.
maximum transmit power, and thus the handover success
rate is decreased, but the network interference is reduced.
Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. If

you need to disable the penalty for a certain handover, set
the related penalty time and penalty level to 0.
This parameter should be set to Yes if the inter-BSC SDCCH

handover is allowed.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, frequent

handovers cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set to a
too great value, handovers cannot be performed timely.
This
to aavoid
unwanted
If thisparameter
parameterisisused
set to
too small
value,handovers
frequent due to
inaccurate
measurement
reports
generated
in the
initial
handovers cannot
be avoided.
If this
parameter
is set
to a
phase
of call
establishment.
too great
value,
handovers cannot be performed timely.
If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side, you
can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed Measurement
Reports
smaller can
thanbe
the
report
frequency
of thehandovers
This
parameter
used
to avoid
unwanted
measurement
reports
from the MS.
Therefore,
is phase
due to inaccurate
measurement
reports
in the it
initial
recommended
that Min Interval for SDCCH HOs be set to a
of call establishment.
small
value.
If
measurement
reports are processed on the BTS side, you
If measurement
reports are
on the BSC
side, the
can
set Report Frequency
of processed
the Preprocessed
Measurement
frequency
of receiving
measurement
reports
on the BSC
Reports smaller
than the
report frequency
of the
side is greater reports
than that
on the
the MS.
BTS Therefore,
side. Therefore,
measurement
from
it is it is
recommended
HOs
recommended that
that Min
Min Interval
Interval for
for SDCCH
TCH HOs
be be
setset
to ato a
great
value.
small value.
If measurement reports are processed on the BSC side, the
frequency of receiving measurement reports on the BSC
side is greater than that on the BTS side. Therefore, it is
recommended that Min Interval for TCH HOs be set to a
great value.
None
According to the P/N criterion, if the load of a non-BCCH
frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT
BCCH HO, the MS with conversation quality higher than the
RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the
cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency.
Thus,
the TCHs
non-BCCH
are
reserved for
According
to theon
P/N
criterion,frequencies
if the load of
a non-BCCH
other
calls.isThis
ensures
of TIGHT
other calls.
frequency
higher
than the
the call
Loadperformance
Threshold for
BCCH HO, the MS with conversation quality higher than the
RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the
cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency.
Thus, the TCHs on non-BCCH frequencies are reserved for
other calls. This ensures the call performance of other calls.
None
The lower the value of this parameter is set, the more

difficult the AMR half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover can
be triggered.

difficult the AMR full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover can
be triggered.

difficult the AMR handover can be triggered.

difficult the AMR handover can be triggered.
The AMR handover can be triggered only when the Intracell

F-H HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes.
1. This parameter must be properly set because it limits the
number of candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too
great value, some desired cells may be excluded from the
candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
an unwanted cell may become the candidate cell. This leads
to
handover
failures
or call
drops. set because it limits the
1. This
parameter
must
be properly
2.
A
cell
can
become
a
candidate
cell only when
receive
number of candidate cells. If this parameter
is setthe
to a
too
level
parameter
is greater
than
the minimum
greatminus
value,this
some
desired cells
may be
excluded
from the
access
level
offset.
candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
an unwanted cell may become the target cell. This leads to
handover failures or call drops.
2. A cell can become a candidate cell only when the uplink
receive level minus this parameter is greater than the
minimum access level offset.
None
Note that in hierarchical handover and load handover, the
priority of the target cell must be higher than the Inter-layer
HO Threshold.
If the DL receive level of a cell is lower than the Inter-layer
HO Threshold, the cell is listed in the candidate cells based
on receive level. The cell takes a low priority for handovers.
None

difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.

difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.

difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered.

difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered.

difficult the edge handover can be triggered.



This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge

HO DL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call
drop may easily occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the
relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased.
This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge
HO UL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call
drop may easily occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the
relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased.
None
None
None
None
Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. In

other words, the edge handover algorithm is enabled.
The lower the layer is, the higher the priority is. The lower
the hierarchy is, the higher the priority is. The layered
hierarchical handover cannot be triggered if the serving cell
has the highest priority in the queue or if the level of the
target cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold.
If this parameter is set to Yes, a call is handed over to the
target cell that has a higher priority than the serving cell.
Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be
enabled. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce
cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and
In
dual-band
networking
mode for densely populated urban
adjacent
channel
interference.
areas, the level drops rapidly due to multiple barriers. The
propagation loss of the 1800 MHz frequency band is greater
than the propagation loss of the 900 MHz frequency band.
Considering the preceding factors, you can enable the
Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed for the DCS1800 cell.
Under normal conditions, this parameter is set to No. To
support the rapid level drop handover, the BSC must have
It
is original
recommended
that this handover be applied only in
the
MR.
special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The
fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used
only in special conditions.
If this parameter is set to YES, extra interference may be
introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is
used.
Yes for hot-spot areas; densely populated urban areas,

common urban areas, suburbs, and rural areas; No for highspeed circumstances
When the authentication and ciphering procedures are

enabled on the existing network, this parameter can be set
to Yes.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the target cell to which the

MS is handed over may not be the cell with the best signal
quality.
None
None
None
The settings of RXLEV-ACCESS-MIN and CRO should

guarantee that cells with same priority have the same cell
reselect offset.
The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum
interval of 5s. When necessary, the MS re-calculates C1 and
C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). The MS
The
value of
CBQ affects
the
of the MS
the
constantly
checks
whether
a access
cell reselection
is to
required
by
system.
referring to following conditions:
Whether the path loss (C1) of the current serving cell drops
below 0 within 5s.If yes, the path loss is too large.
C2isof
an appropriate
non-serving
exceeds
that of
theas
It
recommended
that
you selectcell
a greater
value,
such
serving
cell
in in
5sthe
andarea
the with
following
conditions
are
met:
16, 20, or
25,
heavy
traffic, but
a smaller
The such
C2 ofas
a new
another
LAC light
minus
CRH
value,
2 or cell
3, ininthe
area with
traffic.
An
MS doesinnot
pagings during
(broadcast
therespond
systemto
information
3 andlocation
4 of theupdate.
serving
Thus,
the connection
rate
drops
if cell
reselection
cell)
exceeds
C2 of the
serving
inparameter,
5s.
To properly
specify
the
value
ofcell
this
it is
is
performed.
A
cell reselection
is performed
in the
last 15s,
and the C2 of
necessary
to perform
overall and
long-term
measurement
If
this
parameter
is 5
set
a too small
value,
ping-pong
the
new
cell minus
dBto
constantly
exceeds
the C2 of the
on
the
entities
involved
regarding
their
processing
location
updates
occursuch
andas
the
signaling
loadcapability
on the SDCCH
serving
cell
in 5s.
capability
and
traffic,
the
processing
of
increases.
A better
cell BSC,
existsand
if the
conditions
are met.If
a
the
MSC and
theabove
load on
the A interface,
Abis
If
this
parameter
is
set
to
a
too
great
value,
the
cell
that
better cellUm
exists,
the MSHLR,
reselects
a cell,and does not go to
interface,
interface,
and VLR.
the
camps
onwithin
forperiod
a long
time
be be
thegreater
best after
previous
cell
5s. in
The MS
location
update
themay
MSCnot
must
than
the
thatLA
in changes.
the BSC.
In the GSM system, it is possible that a powered-on MS is
identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location
update request within a long period.
The
larger
thisreselects
parameter
is set,cell
the(in
larger
the number
of
When
the MS
another
the same
LAC), the
paging
sub-channels
in aT3212
cell and
the smaller
the number
MS is restarted
through
timeout
if the T3212
of the of
MSs
paging
Setting
this parameter
new on
celleach
differs
from sub-channel.
that of the original
cell.
larger
can parameter
prolong thediffers
average
service
of MS
batteries
When this
in the
cellslife
of the
same
LAC, it
but
increase
thethe
delay
paging messages
and
reduce
is possible
that
MS of
is identified
as implicit
off-line
if the
system
performance.
MS sends
no location update request for a long period. In
this case, system plays "The subscriber you dial is power
off." even though the called MS is on.
None
In an LAC, the value of this parameter should be the same
in all cells.
The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with
the NCC. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too
many call drops.
The CBA function applies to special conditions. If this
parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0,
only handovers are allowed in a cell, and direct access of an
If
the
of RACH
a cell istosmall,
T should
MS
is number
not allowed.
This conflicts
conditioninapplies
a dual-network
be
set to acell.
great
If the cell,
number
RACH conflicts
a
coverage
Forvalue.
a common
this of
parameter
shouldinbe
cell
is large,
T should be set to a small value. The increase
set to
0.
in
T and
S of
prolongs
the access
time ofaccess
an MS,ofthus
affecting
The
value
CBA affects
the network
an MS.
the access performance of the whole network. Therefore,
appropriate values should be selected for T and S.
When the network traffic is heavy, the success rate of
immediate assignment is low if the sum of S and T is low.
Thus, the value of T should be properly adjusted to make
the sum of S and T great.
When Abis interface use the satellite transmission,this
None
parameter
must be 32.
None
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the

channel resources and cause the congestion.


If this timer is set to a lower value, this may increase the

channel load and influence the access success rate.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this seizes the radio
resources too much, and influences the channel resource
utilization.
call reestablishment success rate.


assignment success rate.


immediate assignment success rate.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
The assignment procedure can reduce the duration of intracell handover.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to Yes, the asynchronous handover

is performed in intra-BSC handover; otherwise, the
synchronous handover is performed.
If the parameter is set too small, a wrong decision might be
made in TRX aiding detection; if the parameter is set too
large, a faulty main-BCCH might lead to delayed triggering
of
TRXparameter
aiding function
cellsmall
initialization.
If this
is set after
to a too
value, the BSC
initiates cell flow control when receiving the RACH overload
message from the BTS. That is, the minimum receive level
of MSs is increased to reduce RACH access requests.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the BTS sends
the overload message to the BSC when a large number of
MSs access the network. In this case, system failure may
occur.
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, a wider bandwidth

is occupied by services.
The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the
proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value
of the major service should be smaller than that of the
minor service. It is recommended that the default value be
used.
used.
used.
used.
None
None
If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS
frequently sends the overload messages to the BSC. Thus,
the system resource utilization decreases and MSs cannot
access the network.
If the value of this parameter is too small,
great, the BTS sends an
frequently
reports overload
indication
messages
the BSC.
overload message
to the BSC
with a long
interval.toThus,
As
a result,
the
BSCoccur.
frequently reports overload indication
system
faults
may
messages to the MSC and thus the MSC may initiate flow
control. If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS
sends overload indication messages to the BSC only when a
large number of MSs access the network and when the
system resources are insufficient. Therefore, the access
If
the value
this
parameter
too
small, the
requests
on of
the
RACH
and all is
the
messages
onsignaling
the PCH are
traffic
on the Abis interface increases and thus the load of
discarded.
the BSC increases. If the value of this parameter is too
great, the BSC cannot process the exceptions in the BTS in
time.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, RF resource
status is reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is
increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, RF
resource status is not updated in time. Therefore, the BSC
cannot handle the interference in the BTS in time.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, radio resource

indication messages are reported frequently and thus the
load of the BSC is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, radio resource
status is not immediately reported and thus the BSC cannot
handle the interference in the BTS in time.
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a small value, the error is small.
None
If this parameter is set to a great value, the error is small.
None
For the BTS2X, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+, and BTS3002C, this

parameter is invalid. For other BTSs, this parameter is valid.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS power

reduces too much. If the value of this parameter is too
small, the BTS power reduces less and the power reduction
effect is not good.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the average
result cannot reflect the change correctly. If the value of
this parameter is too small, the averaging is performed too
frequently and resources are wasted.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to StartUp, the probability that the

BTS transmits at full power increases. The interference
increases. The handover success rate, however, is
increased to some extent.
For V9R3 and later, the VQI can be measured and reported.
For the BTS3002C, if each cell is configured with two TRXs

(O2 or S2), Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted is set to Yes.
The RF connection supports the configuration of the main
and diversity antennas. This parameter is configured for
only the BTS3002C.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the dynamic power

adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm

cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to
a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be
guaranteed.
guaranteed.
guaranteed.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the quality is poor
without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is
degraded; conversely, the quality is good without power
control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is
good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced
and the network interference is increased. If this parameter
is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power
control, thus the conversation quality is degraded.
becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life
is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level
becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is
poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality
is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life
is reduced.
parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level
becomes
low, andiscall
maygreat
easily
occur.
If this parameter
set drop
to a too
value,
the uplink level
The value of this parameter is equal to that of the UL
Expected Level at HO Access.
None
None
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the

currently received measurement reports in the
measurement report compensation queue and then records
the change of the transmit power based on the MS power
and the BTS power in the measurement report.
quality. This average value indicates the radio environment
of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must
consider the delay and accuracy of the average value
caused
by thesome
number
of measurement
reports.
On receiving
consecutive
measurement
reports, the
network calculates the average value of the uplink signal
of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must
caused
by thesome
number
of measurement
reports.
On
receiving
consecutive
measurement
reports, the

levels. This average value indicates the radio environment
caused
by thesome
number
of measurement
reports.
On receiving
consecutive
measurement
reports, the
caused by the number of measurement reports.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power
control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too
small value, the power control may be performed
frequently, thus wasting the resources.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the dynamic

power adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered.
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm

a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot
be guaranteed.
be guaranteed.
be guaranteed.
be guaranteed.
be guaranteed.
be guaranteed.
None
None
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the

currently received measurement reports in the
measurement report compensation queue and then records
the change of the transmit power based on the MS power
and the BTS power in the measurement report.
caused
by thesome
number
of measurement
reports.
On receiving
consecutive
measurement
reports, the
caused
by thesome
number
of measurement
reports.
On receiving
consecutive
measurement
reports, the

caused
by thesome
number
of measurement
reports.
On receiving
consecutive
measurement
reports, the
caused by the number of measurement reports.
None

is reduced.
is reduced.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the signal
quality of the MS is poor without power control. Thus, the
conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to
a too small value, the signal quality is good without power
control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.
becomes
low, andiscall
maygreat
easily
occur.
If this parameter
set drop
to a too
value,
the uplink level

The value of this parameter is equal to that of UL Expected
Level at HO Access.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power
control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too
small value, the power control may be performed
frequently, thus wasting the resources.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the proportion of
the history value in the interference measurement results
decreases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the
proportion of the history value in the interference
measurement results increases.
None
None

Cn-1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower
value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.

Cn-1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower
value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the output power

of the MS decreases; if this parameter is set to a lower
value, the output power of the MS increases.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the tolerance of the
network to downlink errors decreases and the probability of
None
the frequent TBF release increases.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the abnormal TBF
may occur (such as the MS does not receive the message of
current cell in the network caused by the MS activities, and
the network still assigns the radio resources to the MS), the
If
this parameter
is set to
a lower
value,
the abnormal
uplink
network
cannot release
this
TBF, thus
wasting
the network
TBF
release increases caused by the overflow of the N3103.
resources.
IfBased
this parameter
is set
to a higher
value, the
release
time of
on the actual
condition
of existing
network
(for
the
uplinkthe
TBFN3105
delaysoverflow
due to no
response
of the
example,
caused
by the
badMS
Umcaused
If
this
is
set
toquality,
a lower
value,
the link
tolerance
ofand
the
by
theparameter
bad
Um interface
thus
occupying
the link
interface
quality,
the
unstable
transmission
quality,
network
toof
uplink
errors
decreases
andadjust
the probability
of
resources
system.
the MS activities),
you should
properly
this parameter
the
frequent
release
increases.
Based
on the
theTBF
actual
condition
of not
existing
network
(for
to
ensure
downlink
TBF
does
abnormally
release
If
this
is set
to a higher
the bad
abnormal
example,
N3101
overflow
caused
by the
Um TBF
due
toparameter
thethe
frequent
overflow
of
thevalue,
N3105.
may
occurquality,
(such as
MS hastransmission
not receivedlink
the quality,
message
of
interface
thethe
unstable
and
current
cell in the network
caused
by the
MS activities,
the
the MS activities),
you should
properly
adjust
this parameter
If
parameter
is set
a higher
value, this
wastes
network
still
thetouplink
resources
to the
MS), the
tothis
ensure
theassigns
uplink
TBF
does
not
abnormally
release
due to
wireless
resources
andofinfluences
the the
access
network
cannot
release
this
thus
wasting
the network
the frequent
overflow
the TBF,
N3101.
performance
of other MSs in the network, thus causing the
resources.
useless
signaling
seizing
the channel
bandwidth
and
Based on
the actual
condition
of existing
network
(for
wasting
resources.
example,the
thedownlink
N3101 overflow
caused by the bad Um
If
this parameter
set
to a lower
value, the link
uplink
TBF and
interface
quality, is
the
unstable
transmission
quality,
frequently
releasesyou
andshould
establishes,
thus
increasing
the
the MS activities),
properly
adjust
this parameter
delay
for the
thenot
Attach
and Pingrelease
services.
to ensure
thedelay
uplinktests
TBF of
does
abnormally
due to
If
this
parameter
is setTBF
aishigher
value,
the release
delay
The
original
downlink
released
immediately
and
the
frequent
overflow
oftothe
N3101.
of
the uplink
TBFtoincreases,
thus wastingdownlink
the uplink
cannot
be used
transmit subsequent
data.
resources.
Therefore, a new TBF must be established. The original
If
this
set
the
TBF of
downlink
TBF alsois
belower
usedvalue,
for
a new
requirement
If
this parameter
parameter
iscannot
set to
to a
a
higher
value,
thisuplink
can increase
frequently
releases
and
establishes,
thus
increasing
the
uplink
data
transmission.
Therefore,
the
duration
and
the probability of establishing the downlink TBF on the
delay
forthus
the greatly
delay
of thethe
Attach
and
Ping
success
rate
of
the tests
TBF
establishment
are greatly
affected.
PACCH,
reducing
downlink
TBF services.
The
most optimized
should
beMS
a little
greater
than
the
establishment
time; value
however,
if the
needs
to send
new
intervaldata,
between
two the
discontinuous
uplink
uplink
because
BSC6000 does
nottransmissions.
support the
uplink establishment function on the uplink at present, the
reserved uplink TBF must be released and a new TBF must
be established to transmit the new data. Therefore, the
overall transmission performance decreases.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, this can decrease
the
probability
of is
establishing
the downlink
on the
If this
parameter
set to a higher
value, theTBF
load-based
PACCH.
The
downlink
TBF
must
establish
on
the
CCCH,
thus
reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter
is set
to
increasing
the the
establishment
a lower value,
load-based time.
reselection is triggered easily.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of
times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases,
and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this
parameter is set to a lower value, the number of times that
the transmission quality is worsened increases, and the
critical
reselectionisisset
triggered
easily.
If this parameter
to a higher
value, the number of
critical reselection is triggered easily.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of

critical reselection is triggered easily.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of cell
reselections increases; if this parameter is set to a lower
value, the number of cell reselections decreases.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the probability of
the cell reselection increases; if this parameter is set to a
lower value, the probability of the cell reselection
decreases.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the precision of
decision may be reduced; if this parameter is set to a higher
value, the decision may not be performed immediately.
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the weight of the

previous signal level increases; if this parameter is set to a
lower value, the weight of current signal level increases.
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is easier for the

MS to reselect this cell; if this parameter is set to a lower
value, it is difficult for the MS to reselect this cell.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is difficult to
trigger the load-based reselection; if this parameter is set to
a lower value, it is easier to trigger the load-based
reselection.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical
reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to
a lower value, the critical reselection is triggered easily.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical

reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to
a lower value, the critical reselection is triggered easily.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS cannot be
handed over to the target cell that the previous reselection
fails or the load-based reselection occurs within the time
longer than this value; conversely, the time greatly reduces.
If the value of this parameter increases, the MS can be
handed over to the target cell only if the target cell has a
higher level; conversely, the MS can be handed over to the
target cell only if the target cell has a lower level.
The setting of this parameter is to avoid the ping-pong

reselection between cells.
None
None
This parameter is configured according to the congestion of
the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services. If the
underlaid voice services are congested, the overlaid-tounderlaid subcell handover is only allowed; if the overlaid
voice services are congested, the underlaid-to-overlaid
handover is only allowed.
None
None
None
When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the

MS reduces.

MS reduces.
None
For the cell with the good Um interface quality, set the
parameter to MCS6; for the cell with the poor Um interface
quality, set the parameter to MCS4.
None
None
None
proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is;
otherwise, the smaller the proportion of the BEP history
information sent by the MS is.
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to

decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest
value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.



increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest
value, it is hard to increase the CS type.


None
None






None
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of

services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to
a modest value, this kind of services occupies low
bandwidth.
bandwidth.
bandwidth.
bandwidth.

bandwidth.
bandwidth.
bandwidth.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the idle Abis
timeslots cannot be fully used.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the Abis timeslots
may be applied frequently.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PS
services are affected.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the CS services
are affected when there are too many PS services.
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the dynamic
channel resources may be wasted when there are no
services for a long time.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that
a dynamic channel is requested immediately after being
released.
Therefore,
the dynamic
channel
is sent
This parameter
is configured
according
to request
the congestion
frequently.
counter of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice
services.
If the UL voice service is congested, the dynamic channel is
converted at the UL cell.
If the OL voice service is congested, the dynamic channel is
If
this parameter
is set
to a lower value, the TBFs
converted
at the OL
cell.
established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and
the downlink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher.
If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs
established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and
the
downlink
bandwidth
each subscriber
is lower.
If this
parameter
is set tofor
a lower
value, the TBFs
established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and
the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher
If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs
established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and
the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber is lower.
If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic
channels.
If this threshold is low, it is easy to seize dynamic channels.
If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic

channels.
If this threshold is low, it is easy to seize dynamic channels.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, there are
excessive PDCHs and insufficient TCHs. This affects CS
services.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, there are
insufficient PDCHs and excessive TCHs. This affects PS
services.
None
If the threshold of HCS signal strength is high, it is difficult

for the cell to be selected.
If the threshold of HCS signal strength is low, it is easy for
the cell to be selected.
If the priority is high, it is easy for the MS to select this cell
during cell reselection.
If the priority is low, it is difficult for the MS to select this cell
during cell reselection.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the power
consumption and radiation of the MS are high.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS may not
be able to access the channel.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the coverage
area of the cell is large. The MS on the edge of the cell may
not be able to access the system.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the coverage
area of the cell is small. The usage of cell resources
decreases.
None
None
In different routing areas, if this parameter is set to an

excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this
parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent ping-pong
reselection occurs.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the period
when cell reselection is prohibited increases.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the period when
cell reselection is prohibited decreases.
None
None
None
In the same routing area, if this parameter is set to an

excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this
parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent ping-pong
reselection occurs.
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is difficult
for an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may
be wasted.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an
MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access
the
cell.
Therefore,
system
may be value,
overloaded.
If this
parameter
is the
set to
an excessive
it is difficult
be wasted.
the
cell.
Therefore,
system
may be value,
overloaded.
If
this
parameter
is the
set to
an excessive
it is difficult
be wasted.
the
cell.
Therefore,
system
may be value,
overloaded.
If this
parameter
is the
set to
an excessive
it is difficult
be wasted.
MS
to parameter
access the is
cell.
too many
MSsthe
may
access
If this
setHowever,
to an excessive
value,
MS
sends
the
cell.
Therefore,
the system
overloaded.
a
new
Channel
Request
within amay
longbe
interval
after the
channel request fails, thus reducing access collisions but

slowing down the MS access speed.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS sends a
new Channel Request within a short interval after the
If
this parameter
is setthus
to an
excessive value,
MS needs
channel
request fails,
accelerating
the MSthe
access
to
waitbut
for adding
a long time
before
sending the next request. This
speed
access
collisions.
may affect MS services.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that
a response is sent, but the MS has not received it because
of transmission delay. In this case, the MS also resends the
access request.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some

information may be missing.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the reselection
measurement report is sent frequently. This occupies many
bandwidth resources.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some
information may be missing.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the reselection
measurement report is sent frequently. This occupies many
The
MS should
stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time
bandwidth
resources.
after the measurement report is sent.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS may
stay in non-DRX mode for a long time and services may be
affected.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS enters the
DRX mode and may send the measurement report
The principles of cell reselection offset are as follows:
frequently.
1. For the cell with low traffic and low equipment usage,
Huawei recommends that MSs work in the cell. The value
range 0-20 dB is recommended.
2 For the cell with medium traffic, value 0 is recommended.
If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell,
this parameter should be set to a high value when the
coverage area of the micro cell is large.
None
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the extension

measurement report is sent frequently.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, measurement
information is not obtained timely.
None
None
None
None
None

EGPRS MS is shortened.
None
None
None
None
When the radio operating environment is good, decreasing

the parameter value improves the transmission rate.
When the radio operating environment is poor, increasing
the parameter value reduces the times of abnormally
releasing TBFs.
PAN_INC should be greater than PAN_DEC. Usually, PAN_INC
= 2 x PAN_DEC.
However, N3102 cannot exceed PAN_MAX.
None
If
the value of this parameter is set to a modest value, the
MS may retransmits the RLC data block before the BSC
sends an Uplink Acknowledgment message. Thus, many
radio resources are not used but occupied.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the speed of
the sliding window decreases and the probability of the
uplink TBF transmission countdown increases, thus
decreasing the performance of uplink transmission.
To make this value more accurate, you need to estimate the
delay in the transmission between the MS and the BSC6
first.
NoneThis value is set based on the transmission delay.
It takes a shorter time to send the Immediate Assignment

If
this parameter
issupport
set
to AGCHs
athe
higher
theburst.
TBF resources
message
PCHs
and
invalue,
non-DRX
mode
than in
Some
MSson
doallnot
11-bit
access
(including
and
timeslots)
reserved mode,
for a long
DRX
mode.TFI
During
the periodare
of non-DRX
the time.
TBF If
Therefore,
8bit
is recommended.
no
downlink data
needs
to be sent,
many
resources
are not
establishment
time
decreases,
but the
power
consumption
used
for a long time.
of thebut
MSoccupied
increases.
If
is set
smaller value,
the
MS releases
In the
DRXtimer
mode,
theto
MSa monitors
paging
messages
onlythe
on
TBF
resources
within
a shorter
period.
However,
if the
the home
paging
group,
and then
receives
the Immediate
network
sends
new downlink
PDU
data packets,
theAGCH
network
Assignment
message
on all the
paging
blocks and
must
initiateblocks.
a paging
immediate
assignment
procedure.
reservation
TheorTBF
establishment
time increases,
Therefore,
the consumption
downlink TBFof
establishment
takes a longer
but the power
the MS decreases.
period.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the TBF
If
the downloadtime
dataincreases
packets from
thepower
network
are not
establishment
but the
consumption
of
If
the
timer
is T3192
set toIfadoes
lower
value,
the
MSnetwork
can
the
received
and
not
expire,
directly
the
MS
decreases.
this
parameter
isthe
set
to
andetect
excessive
TBF
establishment
failureAssignment
within
a shorter
period.
If the
TBF
sends
a
Packet
Downlink
message
to the
establish
value,
the
TBF establishment
time
decreases
but
power
establishment
the
average
delaythe
of TBF
packet
access is
a
new downlink
TBF,MS
thus
shortening
establishment
consumption
offails,
the
increases.
short,
time. but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad
radio
environment
decreases.
In addition,
small timer
On one
hand, the value
of the T3192
timerthe
depends
on the
value
increases
the probability
of the retransmission
of the
average
transmission
interval between
two successive
packet
access
downlink
data. request, thus increasing the probability of
reassignment
by the
PCU
andto
wasting
system resources.
On the other hand,
you
need
comprehensively
analyze
If
the
timermodels
is set to
higher
value,
thethe
MSservice
takes aload
longer
the
traffic
of athe
cell and
take
of the
period
detect the TBFWhen
establishment
failure. If are
the TBF
cell intotoconsideration.
network resources
establishment
fails,
average
delay
of packet
access
is
sufficient, that
is thethe
GPRS
congestion
rate
is low,
the
Currently,
the GPRS
network
is not
configured
with
theT3192
Gs
long,
but
the
success
rate
of TBF
establishment
in bad
radio
should
beor
set
toPCCCH.
a large
value,
shortening
the
time
to Mode
interface
the
Therefore,
Network
Operation
environment
increases.
establish
newby
TBFs
and improving data transmission rate.
II
is selected
default.

2G Huawei NSN Parameter Mapping

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2G Huawei NSN Parameter Mapping

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Parameters

As per frequency plan

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Cell Extension Type

Cell Antenna Hopping

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Flex HSN Switch

Flex MAIO Switch

Allocation TRX Priority Allowed

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F)

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))

AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))

AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))

Directed Retry Load Access Threshold

Max Resend Times of Phy.Info.

MS Power Prediction after HO

Inter-System Handover Enable

MS Fast Moving HO Allowed

Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes)

60(should same for same LAC)

Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm)

Interf. Band Threshold 4 (-dBm)

Interf. Band Threshold 3 (-dBm)

Interf. Band Threshold 2 (-dBm)

Interf. Band Threshold 1 (-dBm)

Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm)

Filter Length for DL Qual.

Filter Length for UL Qual.

Filter Length for DL RX_LEV

Filter Length for UL RX_LEV

DL Qual. Lower Threshold

DL Qual. Upper Threshold

DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold

DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold